SCALANCE X-300 ___________________

Preface

___________________
Safety instructions 1

___________________
Introduction 2
SIMATIC NET
___________________
Network topologies 3
Industrial Ethernet Switches
SCALANCE X-300 ___________________
Description of the device 4

___________________
Installation 5
Operating Instructions
___________________
Connecting 6

___________________
Configuration, displays and
display elements 7

___________________
Technical specifications 8

___________________
Approvals, certificates,
standards 9

_______________
Accessories
__10
__

_______________
Graphics
__11
__
___________________
Appendix A

02/2012
A5E01113043-12
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG Order number: A5E01113043-12 Copyright © Siemens AG 2010, -,

Industry Sector Ⓟ 02/2012 Technical data subject to change 2012.
Postfach 48 48 All rights reserved
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the Operating Instructions

These Operating Instructions describe the design and functions of the compact and modular
Industrial Ethernet Switches of the SCALANCE X-300 product line and support you during
installation, commissioning, and troubleshooting on site.

Validity of the Operating Instructions

These Operating Instructions are valid for the following product groups of the SCALANCE X-
300 product line, see also section Product overview (Page 21).
● X-300
● X-300M
● XR-300M
● X-300EEC
● XR-300M EEC
● X-300M PoE
● XR-300M PoE
● MM900 media modules
● SFP transceiver

Names of the devices in these operating instructions

Within the SCALANCE X-300 product line, there are product groups, devices and variants.

Classification Description
Product line (X-300) For all devices and variants of all product groups within the SCALANCE X-300 product
line, the term "IE Switch X-300" is used.
Product group For all devices and variants of a product group, only the product group is used.
Device For a device, only the device name is used.
Variant A variant of a device represents a particular design version. They are identified by a
separate order number.
When all variants of a device are meant in the text, "(all)" is often added after the device
name.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 3
Preface

Overview of the technical documentation of the IE Switches X-300

The technical documentation of the X-300 product line is divided into hardware and software
and can be found in the following documents:
● PH - Configuration Manual (PDF)
The software is described in the configuration manual (PH) for both product lines X-300
and X-400.
● BAK - Operating Instructions (compact) on paper
The hardware of each product group is described in the Operating Instructions (compact)
(BAK).
● BA - Operating Instructions (PDF)
The hardware for all product groups and general information can be found in the
Operating Instructions (BA).

Contents Product group Type of document Document identification number

Software All devices of the X-300 and X-400 PH X300/X400 C79000-G89000-C187
description product lines
Hardware All devices of the X-300 product line BA X-300 A5E01113043
description X-300 BAK X-300 A5E00982643A
X-300M BAK X-300M A5E02630801A
XR-300M BAK XR-300M A5E02661171A
X-300EEC BAK X-300 EEC A5E02661176A
XR-300M EEC BAK XR-300M EEC A5E02630809A
X-300M PoE BAK X-300M PoE A5E02630810A
XR-300M PoE BAK XR-300M PoE A5E02661178A
MM900 (media modules) BAK MM900 A5E02630805A
SFP (transceivers) BAK SFP A5E02630804A
Notices leaflet A5E02648904A

SCALANCE X-300
4 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Preface

Further documentation
For help on configuration and diagnostics using Web-based management, the CLI command
line interface, or SNMP, refer to the following documentation:
● Configuration Manual SCALANCE X-300 SCALANCE X-400
This configuration manual is available on the following media:
– On the supplied CD
– In 5 languages on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
19625108 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19625108)
● SIMATIC NET - Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks
This manual is available on the following media:
– On paper under order numbers:
- English version: 6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1
- German version: 6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0
– In 5 languages on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
If you have questions on the use of SIMATIC NET products, please contact your Siemens
sales partner.

Standards and approvals

The devices of the SCALANCE X-300 product line meet the requirements for the CE mark.
For more detailed information, refer to section Approvals, certificates, standards (Page 223).

Integration in STEP 7 projects

The current GSDML file must be used for integration in STEP 7 V5.4 SP5 projects. This
applies to all products covered by these operating instructions.
You can obtain the relevant GSD file from the Internet at:
46183514 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/46183514)
You will find the file for the firmware update V3.3.1 for X-300 under entry ID "46183538".

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 5
Preface

SCALANCE X-300
6 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Table of contents

Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................................... 13
1.1 Important notes on using the device in hazardous areas ............................................................16
2 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 19
2.1 Basics of Ethernet switching ........................................................................................................19
2.2 Product overview .........................................................................................................................21
2.2.1 Type designations........................................................................................................................21
2.2.2 Designs of the IE Switch X-300 devices ......................................................................................23
2.2.3 X-300 product group ....................................................................................................................24
2.2.4 Product group X-300M.................................................................................................................24
2.2.5 Product group XR-300M ..............................................................................................................25
2.2.6 X-300EEC product group.............................................................................................................26
2.2.7 XR-300M EEC product group ......................................................................................................27
2.2.8 Product group X-300M PoE .........................................................................................................27
2.2.9 Product group XR-300M PoE ......................................................................................................28
2.2.10 MM900 media modules................................................................................................................29
2.2.11 Product overview .........................................................................................................................31
3 Network topologies .................................................................................................................................. 33
3.1 Linear structure ............................................................................................................................33
3.2 Star/tree structure ........................................................................................................................33
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager ...................................................................................................34
3.4 Options of media redundancy ......................................................................................................37
3.4.1 Media redundancy in ring topologies ...........................................................................................37
3.4.2 MRP .............................................................................................................................................39
3.4.3 HSR..............................................................................................................................................41
3.5 Redundant coupling of network segments...................................................................................42
4 Description of the device ......................................................................................................................... 45
4.1 Compatibility of SCALANCE X-300 .............................................................................................45
4.2 Product groups.............................................................................................................................47
4.2.1 X-300 product group ....................................................................................................................47
4.2.1.1 SCALANCE X304-2FE product characteristics ...........................................................................47
4.2.1.2 SCALANCE X306-1LD FE product characteristics......................................................................48
4.2.1.3 SCALANCE X307-3 product characteristics................................................................................49
4.2.1.4 SCALANCE X307-3LD product characteristics ...........................................................................50
4.2.1.5 SCALANCE X308-2LH product characteristics ...........................................................................51
4.2.1.6 SCALANCE X308-2LH+ product characteristics .........................................................................52
4.2.1.7 SCALANCE X310FE product characteristics ..............................................................................53
4.2.1.8 SCALANCE X308-2 product characteristics................................................................................54
4.2.1.9 SCALANCE X308-2LD product characteristics ...........................................................................55

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 7
Table of contents

4.2.1.10 SCALANCE X310 product characteristics .................................................................................. 56

4.2.1.11 SCALANCE X320-1FE product characteristics .......................................................................... 57
4.2.1.12 SCALANCE X320-3LD FE product characteristics..................................................................... 58
4.2.2 Product group X-300M ................................................................................................................ 59
4.2.3 Product group XR-300M ............................................................................................................. 62
4.2.4 X-300EEC product group ............................................................................................................ 64
4.2.4.1 Characteristics of the X-300EEC product group ......................................................................... 64
4.2.5 XR-300M EEC product group ..................................................................................................... 69
4.2.5.1 SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC product characteristics................................................................. 69
4.2.6 Product group X-300M PoE ........................................................................................................ 71
4.2.6.1 SCALANCE X308-2M PoE product characteristics .................................................................... 71
4.2.7 Product group XR-300M PoE...................................................................................................... 73
4.2.7.1 SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE product characteristics ................................................................. 73
4.2.8 MM900 media modules............................................................................................................... 75
4.2.8.1 MM992-2M12 product characteristics......................................................................................... 76
4.2.8.2 General notes on MM900............................................................................................................ 80
4.2.9 SFP transceiver........................................................................................................................... 82
4.2.9.1 General notes on SFP................................................................................................................. 84
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches ........................................................................ 85
4.3.1 Ethernet interfaces - electrical ports ........................................................................................... 85
4.3.1.1 10Base-T / 100Base-TX.............................................................................................................. 85
4.3.1.2 1000Base-T................................................................................................................................. 87
4.3.1.3 Power over Ethernet (PoE) ......................................................................................................... 88
4.3.1.4 Ports of the X308-2M PoE .......................................................................................................... 88
4.3.1.5 Ports of the XR-300M PoE.......................................................................................................... 89
4.3.1.6 Isolation between the TP ports ................................................................................................... 90
4.3.2 Ethernet interfaces - optical ports ............................................................................................... 91
4.3.2.1 1000Base-SX .............................................................................................................................. 91
4.3.2.2 1000Base-LX / 100Base-FX ....................................................................................................... 91
4.3.3 Signaling contact......................................................................................................................... 92
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)....................................................................................................... 93
4.5 Components of the product......................................................................................................... 96
4.5.1 Components of the product......................................................................................................... 96
4.5.2 X-300M components of the product............................................................................................ 96
4.5.3 Components of the XR-300M product ........................................................................................ 97
4.5.4 X-300EEC product components ................................................................................................. 98
4.5.5 Components of the XR-300M EEC product ................................................................................ 98
4.5.6 Components of the X308-2M PoE product ................................................................................. 99
4.5.7 Components of the XR-324-4M PoE product ........................................................................... 100
4.5.8 Components shipped with the MM900 product......................................................................... 100
4.5.9 Components shipped with the SFP product.............................................................................. 101
5 Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 103
5.1 Overview of the methods of installation .................................................................................... 104
5.2 Installing a switch ...................................................................................................................... 105
5.2.1 Installation on a DIN rail ............................................................................................................ 105
5.2.2 Installation on a standard rail .................................................................................................... 107
5.2.3 Wall mounting ........................................................................................................................... 108
5.2.4 19" rack mounting ..................................................................................................................... 109
5.2.5 19" rack mounting - X-300EEC product group.......................................................................... 114

SCALANCE X-300
8 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Table of contents

5.2.6 19" rack mounting - XR-300M EEC product group....................................................................115

5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers ........................................................................119
5.3.1 Installation and removal of media modules ...............................................................................119
5.3.2 SFP installation in SFP media module ......................................................................................123
6 Connecting ............................................................................................................................................ 125
6.1 Connecting the switch................................................................................................................125
6.2 Connecting media modules/SFPs..............................................................................................126
6.3 Connecting the grounding..........................................................................................................126
6.3.1 Connecting the functional ground (XR-300M EEC) ...................................................................126
6.3.2 Grounding of the X-300EEC ......................................................................................................127
6.4 Power supply..............................................................................................................................128
6.4.1 24 VDC power supply ................................................................................................................128
6.4.1.1 24 VDC safety extra low voltage................................................................................................128
6.4.1.2 24 VDC - product group X-300 ..................................................................................................130
6.4.1.3 12 / 24 VDC - product group X-300M ........................................................................................130
6.4.1.4 24 VDC - product group X-300EEC...........................................................................................131
6.4.1.5 Connecting a redundant power supply to the X-300EEC ..........................................................131
6.4.1.6 24 V product group XR300M PoE..............................................................................................133
6.4.2 100 to 240 VAC power supply ...................................................................................................134
6.4.2.1 Fitting the connector for 100 to 240 V AC..................................................................................135
6.4.2.2 Connecting the 100 to 240 VAC power supply ..........................................................................137
6.4.2.3 Connecting the power supply 100 to 240 VAC to X-300EEC / XR-300M EEC .........................137
6.4.2.4 Connecting the 100 to 240 V AC power supply with the XR-300M PoE ...................................139
6.5 Signaling contact........................................................................................................................140
6.5.1 24 VDC signaling contact...........................................................................................................140
6.5.2 Signaling contact 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC (X-300EEC)..............................................140
7 Configuration, displays and display elements ........................................................................................ 143
7.1 Assignment of slot numbers.......................................................................................................143
7.2 Show Location ...........................................................................................................................144
7.3 XR-300 diagnostics port.............................................................................................................144
7.4 The SET / SELECT button.........................................................................................................146
7.5 LED display ................................................................................................................................147
8 Technical specifications......................................................................................................................... 153
8.1 Overview of operating temperatures for SCALANCE X-300 .....................................................153
8.2 X-300 technical specifications....................................................................................................154
8.2.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions............................................................155
8.2.2 Connectors and electrical data ..................................................................................................156
8.2.3 Cable lengths .............................................................................................................................159
8.2.4 Other properties .........................................................................................................................161
8.3 X-300M technical specifications.................................................................................................163
8.3.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions............................................................163
8.3.2 Connectors and electrical data ..................................................................................................165
8.3.3 Cable lengths .............................................................................................................................166
8.3.4 Other properties .........................................................................................................................167

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 9
Table of contents

8.4 XR-300M technical specifications ............................................................................................. 169

8.4.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions........................................................... 169
8.4.2 Connectors and electrical data ................................................................................................. 171
8.4.3 Cable lengths ............................................................................................................................ 172
8.4.4 Block architecture...................................................................................................................... 173
8.4.5 Other properties ........................................................................................................................ 174
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC..................................................................................... 175
8.5.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions........................................................... 176
8.5.2 Connectors and electrical data ................................................................................................. 178
8.5.3 Cable lengths ............................................................................................................................ 180
8.5.4 Other properties ........................................................................................................................ 181
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications..................................................................................... 183
8.6.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions........................................................... 183
8.6.2 Connectors and electrical data ................................................................................................. 186
8.6.3 Cable lengths ............................................................................................................................ 188
8.6.4 Block architecture...................................................................................................................... 189
8.6.5 Other properties ........................................................................................................................ 190
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications........................................................................................ 191
8.7.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions........................................................... 191
8.7.2 Connectors and electrical data ................................................................................................. 194
8.7.3 Cable lengths ............................................................................................................................ 196
8.7.4 Other properties ........................................................................................................................ 197
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications ..................................................................................... 198
8.8.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions........................................................... 199
8.8.2 Connectors and electrical data ................................................................................................. 200
8.8.3 Cable lengths ............................................................................................................................ 203
8.8.4 Block architecture...................................................................................................................... 204
8.8.5 Other properties ........................................................................................................................ 205
8.9 MM900 technical specifications ................................................................................................ 206
8.9.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions........................................................... 206
8.9.2 Connectors and electrical data ................................................................................................. 208
8.9.3 Cable lengths ............................................................................................................................ 210
8.9.4 Other properties ........................................................................................................................ 212
8.10 SFP technical specifications ..................................................................................................... 213
8.10.1 SFP construction, installation and environment........................................................................ 213
8.10.2 SFP connectors and electrical data .......................................................................................... 216
8.10.3 Cable lengths for SFP ............................................................................................................... 219
8.10.4 Other properties of SFP ............................................................................................................ 221
9 Approvals, certificates, standards .......................................................................................................... 223
9.1 X-300 product group ................................................................................................................. 223
9.1.1 Approvals, Certificates .............................................................................................................. 223
9.1.2 X-300 type plate ........................................................................................................................ 226
9.1.3 X-300 declaration of conformity ................................................................................................ 227
9.1.4 X-300 FDA and IEC approvals.................................................................................................. 227
9.1.5 Overview of the X-300 approvals.............................................................................................. 228
9.1.6 X-300 mechanical stability (in operation) .................................................................................. 229
9.2 Product group X-300M .............................................................................................................. 229
9.2.1 X-300M approvals, certificates.................................................................................................. 229

SCALANCE X-300
10 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Table of contents

9.2.2 X-300M type plate......................................................................................................................233

9.2.3 X-300M conformity certificates...................................................................................................233
9.2.4 X-300M FDA and IEC approvals................................................................................................234
9.2.5 Overview of X-300M approvals..................................................................................................235
9.2.6 X-300M mechanical stability (in operation)................................................................................236
9.3 Product group XR-300M ............................................................................................................236
9.3.1 XR-300M approvals, certificates ................................................................................................236
9.3.2 XR-300M type plate ...................................................................................................................240
9.3.3 XR-300M conformity certificate..................................................................................................240
9.3.4 XR-300M FDA and IEC approvals .............................................................................................241
9.3.5 Overview of XR-300M approvals ...............................................................................................241
9.3.6 XR-300M mechanical stability (in operation) .............................................................................242
9.4 X-300EEC product group...........................................................................................................243
9.4.1 X-300EEC approvals and certificates ........................................................................................243
9.4.2 X-300EEC declaration of conformity..........................................................................................247
9.4.3 Overview of the approvals for the X-300EEC ............................................................................247
9.4.4 X-300EEC mechanical stability (in operation) ...........................................................................248
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group ....................................................................................................248
9.5.1 XR-300M EEC approvals, certificates .......................................................................................248
9.5.2 XR-300M EEC declaration of conformity ...................................................................................252
9.5.3 Overview of XR-300M EEC approvals.......................................................................................252
9.5.4 XR-300M EEC mechanical stability (in operation).....................................................................254
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE .......................................................................................................254
9.6.1 X-300M PoE approvals, certificates...........................................................................................254
9.6.2 X-300M PoE declaration of conformity ......................................................................................257
9.6.3 Overview of X-300M PoE approvals..........................................................................................258
9.6.4 X-300M PoE mechanical stability in operation ..........................................................................259
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE ....................................................................................................259
9.7.1 XR-300M PoE approvals, certificates ........................................................................................259
9.7.2 X-300M PoE declaration of conformity ......................................................................................262
9.7.3 XR-300M PoE mechanical stability in operation........................................................................263
9.8 MM900 product group................................................................................................................263
9.8.1 MM900 approvals, certificates ...................................................................................................263
9.8.2 MM900 declaration of conformity...............................................................................................266
9.8.3 MM900 FDA and IEC approvals ................................................................................................267
9.9 Product group SFP ....................................................................................................................268
9.9.1 SFP approvals, certificates ........................................................................................................268
9.9.2 SFP type plate............................................................................................................................271
9.9.3 SFP declaration of conformity....................................................................................................271
9.9.4 SFP FDA and IEC approvals .....................................................................................................272
9.9.5 Overview of the SFP approvals .................................................................................................273
9.9.6 SFP mechanical stability (in operation) .....................................................................................275
10 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 277
10.1 Accessories................................................................................................................................277
11 Graphics ................................................................................................................................................ 279
11.1 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................279

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 11
Table of contents

11.2 X-300M dimension drawings..................................................................................................... 284

11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings .................................................................................................. 286
11.4 X-300EEC dimension drawings ................................................................................................ 289
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings.......................................................................................... 291
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings ..................................................................................................... 297
11.7 SFP dimension drawings .......................................................................................................... 300
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings............................................................................................. 301
11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings .......................................................................................... 304
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 307
A.1 TP port....................................................................................................................................... 307
A.2 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug ..................................................................................................... 309
A.3 Electrical tests (EEC devices) ................................................................................................... 311
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 313

SCALANCE X-300
12 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Safety instructions 1
Safety notices on the use of the devices
The following safety notices must be adhered to when setting up and operating the device
and during all associated work such as installation, connecting up, replacing devices or
opening the device.

Safety requirements for installation

According to the UL/CSA certification, the devices are an "open type".
To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame
retardation, stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of
installation are specified:
● Installation in a suitable cabinet.
● Installation in a suitable enclosure.
● Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed control room.

General information

WARNING
Opening the device
DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED.

WARNING
Safety extra low voltage (only devices with 24 VDC power supply)
The equipment is designed for operation with Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) by a
Limited Power Source (LPS).
This means that only SELV / LPS (Limited Power Source) complying with IEC 60950-1 / EN
60950-1 / VDE 0805-1 must be connected to the power supply terminals. The power supply
unit for the equipment power supply must comply with NEC Class 2, as described by the
National Electrical Code (r) (ANSI / NFPA 70).
There is an additional requirement if devices are operated with a redundant power supply:
If the equipment is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies),
both must meet these requirements.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 13
Safety instructions

General notices regarding use in hazardous areas

WARNING
Risk of explosion when connecting or disconnecting the device
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR
COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.

WARNING
Replacing components
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION
2 OR ZONE 2.

WARNING
Requirements for the cabinet/enclosure
When used in hazardous environments corresponding to Class I, Division 2 or Class I,
Zone 2, the device must be installed in a cabinet or a suitable enclosure.

SCALANCE X-300
14 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Safety instructions

Notices for use in hazardous areas according to ATEX

WARNING
Requirements for the cabinet/enclosure
To comply with EU Directive 94/9 (ATEX95), this enclosure must meet the requirements of
at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
The fiber-optic bus connections labeled SCALANCE MM900 (see type plate) may also be
led through a hazardous area zone1 (see also MM900 approvals, certificates (Page 263),
section "Explosion Protection Directive (ATEX)").

WARNING
Suitable cables for temperatures in excess of 70 °C
If the cable or conduit entry point exceeds 70°C or the branching point of conductors
exceeds 80°C, special precautions must be taken.
If the equipment is operated in an air ambient in excess of 50 °C, only use cables with
admitted maximum operating temperature of at least 80 °C.

WARNING
Protection against transient voltage surges
Provisions shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient
voltage surges of more than 40%. This criterion is fulfilled, if supplies are derived from
SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) only.

See also
MM900 approvals, certificates (Page 263)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 15
Safety instructions
1.1 Important notes on using the device in hazardous areas

1.1 Important notes on using the device in hazardous areas

WARNING
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD -
DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS AREA IS KNOWN TO BE
NON-HAZARDOUS.

WARNING
Restricted area of application
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-
hazardous locations only.

WARNING
Restricted area of application
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or non-hazardous locations
only.

Note on devices with power supply 100 to 240 V AC

DANGER
Danger from line voltage
Devices with this mark have a 100 to 240 V AC power supply.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and
installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Connecting and disconnecting may only be performed by an electrical specialist. Connect
or disconnect power supply cables only when the power is turned off!

WARNING
Devices with a 100 to 240 V AC power supply do not have an ATEX approval.
Devices with a 100 to 240 V AC power supply are not approved for use in hazardous areas
according to EC-RL-94/9 (ATEX).

CAUTION
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting
cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where
necessary, with cable ties.

SCALANCE X-300
16 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Safety instructions
1.1 Important notes on using the device in hazardous areas

Safety requirements for installation

According to the IEC 61131-2 standard and therefore in accordance with the EU directive
2006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive), the devices are "open equipment" and in accordance
with UL/CSA certification, they are an "open type".
To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame
retardation, stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of
installation are specified:
● Installation in a suitable cabinet.
● Installation in a suitable enclosure.
● Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed control room.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 17
Safety instructions
1.1 Important notes on using the device in hazardous areas

SCALANCE X-300
18 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Introduction 2
2.1 Basics of Ethernet switching

Ethernet switching
Ethernet switches forward data packets directly from the input port to the appropriate output
port during data exchange based on the address information. Ethernet switches operate on a
direct delivery basis.
Essentially, switches have the following functions:
● Connecting collision domains / subnets
Since repeaters and star couplers (hubs) operate at the physical level, their use is
restricted to the span of a collision domain. Switches connect collision domains. Their use
is therefore not restricted to the maximum span of a repeater network. On the contrary,
extremely large networks with very large spans are possible with switches. The distances
achieved depend on the fiber-optic interfaces used in the devices and the FO fibers used
(see technical specifications).
● Load containment
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) addresses, local data traffic
remains local. In contrast to repeaters or hubs, which distribute data unfiltered to all ports
/ network nodes, switches operate selectively. Only data intended for nodes in other
subnets is switched from the input port to the appropriate output port of the switch. To
make this possible, a table assigning Ethernet (MAC) addresses to output ports is
created by the switch in a "teach-in" mode.
● Limiting the propagation of errors to the subnet involved.
By checking the validity of a data packet on the basis of the checksum which each data
packet contains, the switch ensures that bad data packets are not transported further.
Collisions in one network segment are not passed on to other segments.

The need for Industrial Ethernet switches

With over 95% of LANs based on Ethernet, this is the most commonly used technology. The
use of switches is particularly important: They allow extensive networks with large numbers
of nodes to be set up, increase the data throughput, and simplify network expansion.
The IE Switches X-300 from SIMATIC NET are designed for use in high-speed plant
networks that will also meet future requirements. With the HSR redundancy function and
standby linking of rings, high network availability can be achieved. HSR and standby link
reconfigures the network within 300 ms. Support of IT standards such as VLAN, RSTP,
IGMP, and GARP makes seamless integration of automation networks in existing office
networks possible.
The IE Switches X-300 are designed for use in switching cubicles and cabinets.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 19
Introduction
2.1 Basics of Ethernet switching

Technical options (network topologies)

The IE Switches X-300 simplify the expansion of a network regardless of the network
topology.
You can use an IE Switch X-300 in the following network topologies:
● Linear structure
● Star/tree structure
● Ring with redundancy manager

The maximum cable length is 70 km for single mode gigabit transmission. A mixed topology
consisting of IE Switch X-300 devices and OSMs/ESMs is possible at the electrical ports. A
mixed topology consisting of IE Switch X-300 devices and an OSM via the optical ports is not
possible.
Using an IE Switch X-300 as the redundancy manager in a ring with redundancy manager
provides greater availability. If there is an interruption on the connection between these
switches, the IE Switch X-300 used as redundancy manager acts like a switch and in a very
short time creates a line from the ring. As a result, a functional, end-to-end structure is
restored. For information on this topic, refer to the Configuration Manual "SIMATIC NET -
Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-300 SCALANCE X-400."

SCALANCE X-300
20 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2 Product overview

2.2.1 Type designations

Structure of the type designation

The type designation of an IE Switch X-300 is made up of several parts that have the
following meaning:

X 3 -
EEC ([SDQGHGWHPSHUDWXUHUDQJH
PoE 3RZHURYHU(WKHUQHW
TS 7UDQVSRUWDWLRQ6\VWHP

>-@ 'HYLFHVZLWKRXWPRGXOHVORWV
M 0RGXODUGHYLFH
,QWHUIDFH
1XPEHURIRSWLFDOSRUWVRU
1XPEHURIPRGXOHVORWVZLWKPRGXODUGHYLFHV
1XPEHURIHOHFWULFDOSRUWVRU
7RWDOQXPEHURISRUWVZLWKPRGXODUGHYLFHV
>-@ &RPSDFWKRXVLQJ
R 5DFNGHYLFH
Interfaces of devices without optical ports:

Interface Property
FE Electrical RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps.
[-] Electrical RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps or 10/100/1000 Mbps.

Interfaces of devices with optical ports:

Interface Property
FE SC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 5 km).
LD FE SC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 26 km).
[-] SC port 1000 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 750 m).
LD SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 10 km).
LH SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 40 km).
LH+ SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 70 km).

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 21
Introduction
2.2 Product overview

If information applies to all devices, the term "IE Switches X-300" is used. If information
applies to only a particular product group, the relevant names will be used without extra
information on the type or number of interfaces. Examples: "X-300" stands for non-modular
devices with a compact housing, "XR-300" means all rack devices, "X-300M" means all
modular devices etc.

Note
SCALANCE X320-3LD FE
The SCALANCE X320-3LD FE deviates from the type designation in that it has an SC port
for multimode fiber-optic cable up to a maximum of 5 km in length and two SC ports for
single mode fiber-optic cable up to a maximum of 26 km in length.
• Port 21: Multimode
• Port 22: LD (long distance, single mode)
• Port 23: LD (long distance, single mode)

SCALANCE X-300
22 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2.2 Designs of the IE Switch X-300 devices

Designs and variants of the IE Switch X-300

The IE switches of the SCALANCE X-300 product line can have the following designs and
variants:

Designs of the IE Switch X300

X Compact devices: IE switches X-300 (3 sizes: 60, 120, 180)
XR Rack devices (R): 19" IE switches (for 19" cabinet installation)
X-300EEC IE Switches X-300: 19"/2 devices (width: 216 mm)

Variant M of the IE Switch X-300

M Modular devices (M) are intended to accommodate media modules.
• Partially modular devices: Some of the ports (slots) are intended to accommodate media modules.

Example: X308-2M
• Fully modular devices: All ports (slots) are intended to accommodate media modules.

Example: XR324-12M

Figure 2-1 Designs of the IE Switch X-300, example with modular devices (M)
The figure shows the X308-2M and XR324-12M switches with slots for media modules
marked

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 23
Introduction
2.2 Product overview

Table 2- 1 Legend

No. in Components for the modular devices (M):

Fig.
[1] Module slots for MM900 media modules
[2] Slots for 2-port MM900 media modules
[3] SFP media module (MM992-2SFP) for MM900 media modules
The SFP transceivers (small form-factor pluggable) may only be used in the SFP media module.
[4] Grip on the media module for installing/removing
[5] SFP transceiver
[6] Clip on the SFP for installation/removal

2.2.3 X-300 product group

Type Order number

X304-2FE 6GK5 304-2BD00-2AA3
X306-1LD FE 6GK5 306-1BF00-2AA3
X307-3 6GK5 307-3BL00-2AA3
X307-3LD 6GK5 307-3BM00-2AA3
X308-2 6GK5 308-2FL00-2AA3
X308-2LD 6GK5 308-2FM00-2AA3
X308-2LH 6GK5 308-2FN00-2AA3
X308-2LH+ 6GK5 308-2FP00-2AA3
X310 6GK5 310-0FA00-2AA3
X310FE 6GK5 310-0BA00-2AA3
X320-1FE 6GK5 320-1BD00-2AA3
X320-3LD FE 6GK5 320-3BF00-2AA3

2.2.4 Product group X-300M

Product line Product Device: (Variant) [Order number]

group SCALANCE
X-300 X-300M X308-2M (-) [6GK5 308-2GG00-2AA2]
X-300 X-300M X308-2M TS (-) [6GK5 308-2GG00-2CA2]

SCALANCE X-300
24 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2.5 Product group XR-300M

Product line Product Device: (Variant) [Order number]

group SCALANCE
X-300 XR-300M XR324-12M (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet front) [6GK5 324-0GG00-1AR2]
XR324-12M (1 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable [6GK5 324-0GG00-3AR2]
outlet front)
XR324-12M (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet rear) [6GK5 324-0GG00-1HR2]
XR324-12M (1 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable [6GK5 324-0GG00-3HR2]
outlet rear)
XR324-12M TS (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet front, [6GK5 324-0GG00-1CR2]
modules varnished)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 25
Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2.6 X-300EEC product group

The following features distinguish the different X-300EEC variants:
● 24 to 48 VDC power supply unit or multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC/ 60 to
250 VDC
● Power supply unit single or double (redundant)
● Printed circuit board unvarnished or varnished (for aggressive environments)

Table 2- 2 Variants of the X-300EEC product group

Product / ports Variant Order number

X302-7EEC 1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-1EA3
• 2 electrical ports 1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-1GA3
Printed board varnished
• 7 optical ports
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-2EA3
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-2GA3
Printed board varnished
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-3EA3
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-3GA3
Printed board varnished
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-4EA3
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5302-7GD00-4GA3
Printed board varnished
X307-2EEC 1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-1EA3
• 7 electrical ports 1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-1GA3
Printed board varnished
• 2 optical ports
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-2EA3
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-2GA3
Printed board varnished
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-3EA3
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-3GA3
Printed board varnished
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-4EA3
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC 6GK5307-2FD00-4GA3
Printed board varnished

* See naming key below

SCALANCE X-300
26 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2.7 XR-300M EEC product group

Product line Product Device: (Variant) [Order number]

group SCALANCE
X-300 XR-300M XR324-4M EEC (1 x 24 VDC, cable outlet front) [6GK5 324-4GG00-1ER2]
EEC XR324-4M EEC (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet front) [6GK5 324-4GG00-2ER2]
XR324-4M EEC (1 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable [6GK5 324-4GG00-3ER2]
outlet front)
XR324-4M EEC (2 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable [6GK5 324-4GG00-4ER2]
outlet front)
XR324-4M EEC (1 x 24 VDC, cable outlet rear) [6GK5 324-4GG00-1JR2]
XR324-4M EEC (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet rear) [6GK5 324-4GG00-2JR2]
XR324-4M EEC (1 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable [6GK5 324-4GG00-3JR2]
outlet rear)
XR324-4M EEC (2 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable [6GK5 324-4GG00-4JR2]
outlet rear)

2.2.8 Product group X-300M PoE

Interfaces

Type RJ-45 port electrical Module slots

10/100/1000 Mbps
X308-2M PoE 4 2

Components of the product

The following parts ship with a SCALANCE X-300M PoE:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium
● 4-pin terminal block for the power supply
● 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
● Operating Instructions (compact)
● Product CD with documentation and software

Order numbers

Type Order number

X308-2M PoE 6GK5 308-2QG00-2AA2

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 27
Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2.9 Product group XR-300M PoE

Components of the product

The following parts ship with a SCALANCE XR-324-4M PoE:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium
● 2 mounting brackets and 8 screws (M3x5 recessed head, drive: Torx) for 19" rack
installation
● Connecting cable for the diagnostics port
● Operating Instructions (compact)
● Product CD with documentation and software
● For devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply:
– A 2-pin terminal block for the power supply
– A 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
● With devices with 24 V DC power supply:
– 4-pin terminal block for the power supply
– 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
– 4 adhesive feet for desktop mounting

SCALANCE X-300
28 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2.10 MM900 media modules

Note
Type designation and labeling of a media module differ
Example: The device with order number 6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0 is called, for example,
"MM992-2SFP", the labeling on the device is "9922AS".
The labeling on the devices is shown in bold face in the following table following the [order
numbers].

Only the media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted with approved SFP transceivers. The
SFP media module can be fitted with up to two SFPs.

Type designation Interfaces [Order number]

Labeling on the device
MM992-2CUC (2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with [6GK5 992-2GA00-8AA0]
securing collar) 9922GA
MM992-2CU (2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical without [6GK5 992-2SA00-8AA0]
securing collar) 9922SA
MM992-2M12 (2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, GE M12 connector electrical) [6GK5 992-2HA00-0AA0]
9922HA
MM992-2SFP (2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP media module) [6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0]
9922AS
MM991-2 (2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC ports optical, multimode FO [6GK5 991-2AB00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 3 km) 9912AB
MM991-2LD (2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC ports optical, single mode FO [6GK5 991-2AC00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 26 km) 9912AC
MM991-2 (SC) (2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode FO [6GK5 991-2AD00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 3 km) 9912AD
MM991-2LD (SC) (2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO [6GK5 991-2AF00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 26 km) 9912AF
MM991-2LH+ (SC) (2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO [6GK5 991-2AE00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 70km) 9912AE
MM992-2 (2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode FO [6GK5 992-2AL00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 750m) 9922AL
MM992-2LD (2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO [6GK5 992-2AM00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 10km) 9922AM
MM992-2LH (2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO [6GK5 992-2AN00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 40km) 9922AN
MM992-2LH+ (2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO [6GK5 992-2AP00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 70km) 9922AP
MM992-2ELH (2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO [6GK5 992-2AQ00-8AA0]
cable, up to max. 120km) 9922AQ

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 29
Introduction
2.2 Product overview

Type key for the MM900 media modules

The type designation of an MM900 media module is made up of several parts that have the
following meaning:

M M 9 91-2
100 Mbps Number of ports Interface

Interface Property
[-] BFOC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable
LD BFOC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable
(SC) SC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 3 km)
LD (SC) SC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 26 km)
LH+ (SC) SC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 70 km)

MM992-2
1000 Mbps Number of ports Interface

Interface Property
CU RJ-45 port electrical 10/100/1000 Mbps without securing collar
CUC RJ-45 port electrical 10/100/1000 Mbps with securing collar
M12 M12 connection electrical 10/100/1000 Mbps
[-] SC port 1000 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 750 m)
LD SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 10km)
LH SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 40 km)
LH+ SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 70 km)
ELH SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 120 km)
SFP SFP media module

SCALANCE X-300
30 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Introduction
2.2 Product overview

2.2.11 Product overview

Media modules

NOTICE

The SFP media modules MM992-2SFP may only be fitted with approved transceivers. The
SFP media module can be fitted with up to two SFP transceivers.
The SFP media modules MM992-4SFP may only be fitted with approved transceivers. The
SFP media module can be fitted with up to four SFP transceivers.

Media module Properties Order number Labeling on the device

MM992-2SFP 2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP media module 6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0 9922AS
MM992-4SFP 4 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP media module 6GK5 992-4AS00-8AA0 9924AS

SFP transceiver

Transceiver Properties Order number

*SFP991-1 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 5 km 6GK5 991-1AD00-8AA0
*SFP991-1LD 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km 6GK5 991-1AF00-8AA0
*SFP991-1LH+ 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70 km 6GK5 991-1AE00-8AA0
SFP991-1ELH200 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 200 km 6GK5 991-1AE30-8AA0
SFP992-1 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750 m 6GK5 992-1AL00-8AA0
SFP992-1LD 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10 km 6GK5 992-1AM00-8AA0
SFP992-1LH 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40 km 6GK5 992-1AN00-8AA0
SFP992-1LH+ 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70 km 6GK5 992-1AP00-8AA0
SFP992-1ELH 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120 km 6GK5 992-1AQ00-8AA0

*Cannot be operated in the SFP+ slots.

SFP+ transceiver

Transceiver Properties Order number

**SFP993-1 1 x 10 Gbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 300 m 6GK5 993-1AT00-8AA0
**SFP993-1LD 1 x 10 Gbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10 km 6GK5 993-1AU00-8AA0
**SFP993-1LH 1 x 10 Gbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40 km 6GK5 993-1AV00-8AA0

**Cannot be operated in the SFP+ slots.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 31
Introduction
2.2 Product overview

SCALANCE X-300
32 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Network topologies 3
3.1 Linear structure

Functional description
Linear structures can be created with the IE Switches X-300. The cascading depth and total
span of a network are limited only by the signal propagation times of the communication
connections.

Properties of the linear structure

Each IE Switch X-300 communicates over a TP or FO cable with a neighboring Ethernet
switch. Communication is possible over the optical or the electrical ports.

Configuration example
Sample configuration with SCALANCE X308-2, SIMATIC S7-300/400 and operator panel as
end devices.

Figure 3-1 Linear structure (optical)

3.2 Star/tree structure

Functional description
Star/tree structures can be created with the IE Switches X-300. The cascading depth and
total span of a network are limited only by the signal propagation times of the communication
connections.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 33
Network topologies
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager

Properties of a star structure

Each IE Switch X-300 communicates over a TP or FO cable with a central switch with which
all other switches are also connected within a star structure. Communication is possible over
the optical or the electrical ports.

Configuration example
Sample electrical configurations with SCALANCE X310, SCALANCE X-200, SIMATIC S7-
300/400, SIMATIC ET 200, and operator panels as end devices.

Figure 3-2 Star structure (electrical)

3.3 Ring with redundancy manager

Ring with redundancy manager

To increase availability, linear (bus) topologies of up to 50 switches can be closed to form a
ring:
● Optical: SCALANCE X-400, SCALANCE X-300, SCALANCE X-200
● Electrical: SCALANCE X-400, SCALANCE X-300, SCALANCE X-200 or ESM

SCALANCE X-300
34 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Network topologies
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager

Functional description
The two ends of the bus are closed to form a ring by a IE Switch X-300 operating as a
redundancy manager. Both the redundancy manager and the other IE switches (redundancy
clients) in the ring must be interconnected via their ring ports (see below).
The redundancy manager function is enabled by the SELECT/SET button or by a setting in
the software. For more detailed information, refer to the configuration manual
"SCALANCE X-300 and SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet Switches".
In contrast to the ring ports of the redundancy clients, the ring ports of the redundancy
manager are disconnected when the network is operating problem-free. The IE Switch X-300
operating in the role of redundancy manager mode monitors the connected bus over its ring
ports and switches the ring ports through if there is an interruption on the connected bus; in
other words, it restores a functioning bus over this substitute path. Reconfiguration is
achieved within 0.3 s. As soon as the problem is eliminated, the original topology is restored;
in other words, the ring ports in the redundancy manager are disconnected from each other
again.
In a ring with media redundancy, only one device can operate as the redundancy manager.

Electrical ring ports

An electrical ring with redundancy manager can be set up via the RJ-45 connectors that
allow attachment of electrical (twisted pair) connections (10, 100 and/or 1000 Mbps). The
SCALANCE X310FE is an exception to this. This device only allows attachment of electrical
(twisted-pair) connections at 10 or 100 Mbps.
You can configure which ports take on the function of ring ports individually. The following
table shows the factory defaults for the ring ports.

Device Factory setting for the ring ports

X-300 Port 9 and port 10
X-300 EEC Port 8 and port 9
X-304-2FE Port 1 and port 2
X-306-1LD FE Port 2 and port 3
X308-2M Port 1 and port 2
X-320-1FE Port 1 and port 2
X-320-3LD FE Port 1 and port 2
XR324-4M Port 1 and port 2
XR324-12M Port 1.1 and port 1.2

Optical ring ports (1000 Mbps)

The use of the IE Switch X-300 in an optical ring with a redundancy manager is basically
possible. For operation in the optical ring, the optical ports 9 and 10 are the defaults.
Exception:
● The SCALANCE X310 and X310FE devices do not have optical ports.
● The optical ports of the X-300EEC support only 100 Mbps.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 35
Network topologies
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager

Configuration example
Sample configurations with IE Switch X-300, SIMATIC S7-200/300/400, operator control and
monitoring system, H system, and PC as end devices.

Figure 3-3 Gigabit ring with redundancy manager (RM)

Figure 3-4 Ring with FO cable and redundancy manager

SCALANCE X-300
36 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Network topologies
3.4 Options of media redundancy

3.4 Options of media redundancy

There are various options available to increase the network availability of an Industrial
Ethernet network with optical or electrical linear bus topologies:
● Mesh networks
● Parallel connection of transmission paths
● Closing a linear bus topology to form a ring topology

3.4.1 Media redundancy in ring topologies

Structure of a ring topology

Nodes in a ring topology can be external switches and/or the integrated switches of
communications modules.
To set up a ring topology with media redundancy, you bring together the two free ends of a
linear bus topology in one device. Closing the linear bus topology to form a ring is achieved
with two ports (ring ports) of a device in the ring. This device is the redundancy manager. All
other devices in the ring are redundancy clients.

7HVWIUDPHV

5HGXQGDQF\PDQDJHU
5HGXQGDQF\FOLHQWV

7HVWIUDPHV

Figure 3-5 Devices in a ring topology with media redundancy

The two ring ports of a device are the ports that establish the connection to its two
neighboring devices in the ring topology. The ring ports are selected and set in the
configuration of the relevant device. On the S7 Ethernet CP modules, the ring ports are
indicated by an "R" after the port number.

Note
Create the configuration of the devices to be connected to form a ring before you close the
ring.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 37
Network topologies
3.4 Options of media redundancy

How media redundancy works in a ring topology

When using media redundancy, the data paths between the individual devices are
reconfigured if the ring is interrupted at one point. Following reconfiguration of the topology,
the devices can once again be reached in the resulting new topology.
In the redundancy manager, the 2 ring ports are disconnected from each other if the network
is uninterrupted. This prevents circulating data frames. In terms of data transmission, the ring
topology is a linear bus topology. The redundancy manager monitors the ring topology. It
does this by sending test frames both from ring port 1 and ring port 2. The test frames run
round the ring in both directions until they arrive at the other ring port of the redundancy
manager.
An interruption of the ring can be caused by loss of the connection between two devices or
by failure of a device in the ring.
If the test frames of the redundancy manager no longer arrive at the other ring port, the
redundancy manager connects its two ring ports. This substitute path once again restores a
functioning connection between all remaining devices in the form of a linear bus topology.
The time between the ring interruption and restoration of a functional linear topology is
known as the reconfiguration time.
As soon as the interruption is eliminated, the original transmission paths are established
again, the two ring ports of the redundancy manager are disconnected and the redundancy
clients informed of the change. The redundancy clients then use the new paths to the other
devices.
If the redundancy manager fails, the ring becomes a functional linear bus.

Media redundancy methods

The following media redundancy methods are supported by SIMATIC NET products:
● HSR (High Speed Redundancy)
Reconfiguration time: 0.3 seconds
● MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol)
Reconfiguration time: 0.2 seconds
Automatic configuration of the ring
The mechanisms of these methods are similar. With both methods, up to 50 devices can
participate in the ring. HSR and MRP cannot be used in the ring at the same time.
If you configure your plant using STEP 7, you can only select MRP as the media redundancy
method.
If you configure your devices with Web Based Management, CLI or SNMP, you can choose
either HSR or MRP.

SCALANCE X-300
38 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Network topologies
3.4 Options of media redundancy

3.4.2 MRP
The "MRP" method conforms to the Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) specified in the
standard IEC 62439-2 Edition 1.0 2010-02.
The reconfiguration time after an interruption of the ring is a maximum of 0.2 seconds.

Requirements
The following requirements must be met for problem-free operation with the MRP media
redundancy protocol:
● MRP is supported in ring topologies with up to 50 devices. Exceeding this number of
devices can lead to a loss of data traffic.
● The ring in which you want to use MRP may only consist of devices that support this
function. This applies, for example, to the following devices:
– Industrial Ethernet switches
SCALANCE X-200 as of firmware version V4.0
SCALANCE X-200 IRT as of firmware version V4.0
SCALANCE X-300 as of firmware version V3.0
SCALANCE X-400 as of firmware version V3.0
– Communications processors
CP 443-1 Advanced (6GK7 443-1GX20-0XE0) as of firmware version V2.0
CP 343-1 Advanced (6GK7 343-1GX30-0XE0) as of firmware version V1.0
CP 1616 (6GK1 161-6AA00) as of firmware version V2.2
CP 1604 (6GK1 160-4AA00) as of firmware version V2.2
– Non-Siemens devices that support this functionality.
Further Siemens devices are planned that will support MRP.
● All devices must be interconnected via their ring ports.
● If you configure in STEP 7, MRP must be enabled on all devices in the ring (see "MRP
configuration in PROFINET IO").
● If you configure with Web Based Management, CLI or SNMP, set all the devices in the
ring to "MRP Client" or "Automatic Redundancy Detection". At least one device in the ring
must have the setting "Automatic Redundancy Detection".
In their basic status, the "Automatic Redundancy Detection" mode is set on IE switches
as default.
● The connection settings (transmission medium / duplex) must be set to full duplex and at
least 100 Mbps for all ring ports. Otherwise there may be a loss of data traffic.
– To do this, set all the ports involved in the ring to "Automatic settings" in the "Options"
tab of the properties dialog during STEP 7 configuration.
– If you configure with Web Based Management, the ring ports are set automatically to
autonegotiation.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 39
Network topologies
3.4 Options of media redundancy

Topology
The following schematic shows a possible topology for devices in a ring with MRP.

7
6

3
5HGXQGDQF\GRPDLQ
9
5
4
10

6ZLWK&3$GYDQFHG +0,VWDWLRQ
6&$/$1&(;VZLWFK (QJLQHHULQJVWDWLRQ
3&ZLWK&3 (76
6ZLWK&3$GYDQFHG (70
(7SUR

Figure 3-6 Example of a ring topology with the MRP media redundancy protocol

The following rules apply to a ring topology with media redundancy using MRP:
● All the devices connected within the ring topology are members of the same redundancy
domain.
● One device in the ring is acting as redundancy manager.
● All other devices in the ring are redundancy clients.
Non MRP-compliant devices can be connected to the ring via a SCALANCE X switch or via
a PC with a CP 1616.

Note
SCALANCE X-300 - modular devices (M)
Remember that in the modular switches the ring ports are located on MM900 media
modules.

SCALANCE X-300
40 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Network topologies
3.4 Options of media redundancy

3.4.3 HSR
The "HSR" method allows a reconfiguration time of 0.3 seconds following an interruption in
the ring.

Requirements
The following requirements must be met for problem-free operation with the HSR media
redundancy method:
● HSR is supported in ring topologies with up to 50 devices. Exceeding this number of
devices can lead to a loss of data traffic.
● The ring in which you want to use HSR may only consist of devices that support this
function. This applies, for example, to the following devices: X-400 IE switches, X-300
IE switches, X-200 IE switches and OSM / ESM.
● All devices must be interconnected via their ring ports.
● A device in the ring must be configured as redundancy manager by selecting the "HSR
Manager" setting. You can do this with the button on the front of the device, Web Based
Management, CLI or SNMP.
● On all other devices in the ring, either the "HSR Client" or "Automatic Redundancy
Detection" mode must be activated.
You can do this with Web Based Management, CLI or SNMP.
● In the basic status, the "HSR Client" or "Automatic Redundancy Detection" mode is set as
default.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 41
Network topologies
3.5 Redundant coupling of network segments

3.5 Redundant coupling of network segments

Redundant coupling of network segments

The example of redundant coupling of two network segments as shown here, for example
rings with a redundancy manager, can be implemented homogeneously with all SCALANCE
X300 variants.

Figure 3-7 Redundant coupling of two subnets in mixed operation with SCALANCE X310 and
SCALANCE X308-2

SCALANCE X-300
42 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Network topologies
3.5 Redundant coupling of network segments

In this case, network segments are rings with a redundancy manager (RM). The rings can
also be interrupted at one point (linear topology).
For a redundant link as shown in the figure, two IE Switches X-300 must be configured within
a network segment. This configuration is set in Web Based Management, Command Line
Interface or using SNMP access. For more detailed information, refer to the "Configuration
Manual SCALANCE X-300 and SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet Switches". The two
IE Switches X-300 connected in the configuration exchange data frames with each other to
synchronize their operating statuses (one device is master and the other slave). If there are
no problems, only the link from the master to the other network segment is active. If this link
fails (for example due to a link-down or a device failure), the slave activates its link as long
as the problem persists. Reconfiguration takes place within 0.3 s.

Note
If IE Switches X-300 or SCALANCE X408-2 devices are used exclusively for redundant
coupling of the gigabit rings, the coupling links can also be designed with a gigabit
transmission rate.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 43
Network topologies
3.5 Redundant coupling of network segments

SCALANCE X-300
44 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Description of the device 4
4.1 Compatibility of SCALANCE X-300

Compatibility list

Note
Modular devices (M)
The MM900 media modules and the SFP transceivers are used only in modular devices (M).

The following products and devices are compatible with IE Switches X-300:
● End devices:
All SIMATIC NET products with a TP interface can be connected to the ports of
IE Switches X-300.
● Network components with a bus (linear) or star structure:
ESM/OSM
OMC (TP cable max. 6 m long)
SCALANCE X005
SCALANCE X-100
SCALANCE XB000
SCALANCE XB000G
SCALANCE X-100 media converter
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE XF200
SCALANCE XF204IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE S-600
SCALANCE W-700

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 45
Description of the device
4.1 Compatibility of SCALANCE X-300

● Network components in a ring structure with IE Switch X-300 as redundancy manager

– Electrical ring structure:
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE XF200
SCALANCE XF204IRT
SCALANCE X-300 (it may be necessary to configure other ring ports)
SCALANCE X-400
– Optical ring structure:
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300 (exceptions SCALANCE X310 and SCALANCE X310FE)
● Redundant coupling of networks
– In the network segment with the master-slave pair to be configured:
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300
In the standby coupling also to SCALANCE X-200
– In the network segment to be coupled:
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE XF200
SCALANCE XF204IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400

Note
All compatibility information assumes the correct use of the TP and FOC cables.

SCALANCE X-300
46 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2 Product groups

4.2.1 X-300 product group

4.2.1.1 SCALANCE X304-2FE product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X304-2FE has four RJ-45 jacks and two FO ports (for multimode fiber) for
the connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-1 X304-2FE

Column 1 2
Port number P1*2) P3
P4
P2*2) P5
P6
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 47
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.2 SCALANCE X306-1LD FE product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X306-1LD FE has 6 RJ-45 jacks and 1 FO port (for single mode fiber) for
attachment of end devices or further network segments.

Figure 4-2 SCALANCE X306-1LD FE

Column 1 2
Port number P1 *2) P4
P5
P2 P6
P3 P7
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
48 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.3 SCALANCE X307-3 product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X307-3 has 7 RJ-45 jacks and 3 FO ports (for multimode fiber) for the
connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-3 SCALANCE X307-3

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 *3) P9 *3)
P2 P6
P3 P7 - P10 *3)
P4 -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 49
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.4 SCALANCE X307-3LD product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X307-3LD has 7 RJ-45 jacks and 3 FO ports (for single mode fiber) for the
connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-4 SCALANCE X307-3LD

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 *3) P9 *3)
P2 P6
P3 P7 - P10 *3)
P4 -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
50 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.5 SCALANCE X308-2LH product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2LH has 8 RJ-45 jacks and 2 FO ports (for single mode fiber) for the
connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-5 SCALANCE X308-2LH

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 *1) P9 *3)
P2 P6 -
P3 P7 - P10 *3)
P4 - -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 51
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.6 SCALANCE X308-2LH+ product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2LH+ has 8 RJ-45 jacks and 2 FO ports (for single mode fiber) for the
connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-6 SCALANCE X308-2LH+

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 *1) P9 *3)
P2 P6 -
P3 P7 - P10 *3)
P4 - -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
52 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.7 SCALANCE X310FE product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X310FE has 10 RJ-45 jacks for the connection of end devices or other
network segments.

Figure 4-7 SCALANCE X310FE

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 P9
P2 P6 - P10
P3 P7 - -
P4 - - -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 53
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.8 SCALANCE X308-2 product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2 has 8 RJ-45 jacks and 2 FO ports (for multimode fiber) for the
connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-8 SCALANCE X308-2

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 *1) P9 *3)
P2 P6 -
P3 P7 - P10 *3)
P4 - -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
54 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.9 SCALANCE X308-2LD product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2LD has 8 RJ-45 jacks and 2 FO ports (for single mode fiber) for the
connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-9 SCALANCE X308-2LD

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 *1) P9 *3)
P2 P6 -
P3 P7 - P10 *3)
P4 - -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 55
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.10 SCALANCE X310 product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X310 has 10 RJ-45 jacks for the connection of end devices or other
network segments.

Figure 4-10 SCALANCE X310

Column 1 2 3 4
Port number P1 P5 P8 *1) P9 *1)
P2 P6 - P10 *1)
P3 P7 - -
P4 - - -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
56 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.11 SCALANCE X320-1FE product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X320-1 FE has 20 RJ-45 jacks and 1 FO port (for multimode fiber) for the
connection of end devices or other network segments.

Figure 4-11 SCALANCE X320-1 FE

Column 1 2 3 4 5 6
Port number P1 P5 P9 P13 P17 P21 *2)
P2 P6 P10 P14 P18
P3 P7 P11 P15 P19 -
P4 P8 P12 P16 P20 -
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 57
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.1.12 SCALANCE X320-3LD FE product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X320-3LD FE has 20 RJ-45 jacks and 1 FO port (for multimode fiber) and
2 FO ports (for single mode fiber) for the connection of end devices or other network
segments.

Figure 4-12 SCALANCE X320-3LD FE

Column 1 2 3 4 5 6
Port number P1 P5 P9 P13 P17 P21 *2)
P2 P6 P10 P14 P18 P22 *2)
P3 P7 P11 P15 P19 P23 *2)
P4 P8 P12 P16 P20
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port

SCALANCE X-300
58 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.2 Product group X-300M

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2M and X308-2M TS are partly modular devices and each has 8
ports.
● 4 fixed ports in the base device:
4 electrical RJ-45 jacks (with securing collar) for connection of end devices or other
network segments.
● 4 modular ports via module slots:
Two media modules (optical or electrical as required) can be combined using slots (S1-
S2) depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are
connected according to the media modules being used.

Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.

Figure 4-13 SCALANCE X308-2M with dummy covers

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 59
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments (example)

CAUTION
Use only approved media modules in the module slots
The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module
slot, but rather on the selected media module.
Refer to the section Media module installation in slot.

Example of connections

Figure 4-14 SCALANCE X308-2M with MM992-2 and MM991-2

SCALANCE X-300
60 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Column 1 2 3 4
Slot number - - S1 S2
Media MM992-2 MM991-2
modules used
Port number - P1 *1) P5 *) P7 *)
- P2 *1)
- P3 *1) P6 *) P8 *)
- P4 *1)
Connection type No marking → Fast Ethernet port
electrical *1) marking → gigabit Ethernet port
Connection type *2) marking → Fast Ethernet port
optical *3) marking → gigabit port
Connection type *) marking→ type of attachment depending on module used
Module slot

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 61
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.3 Product group XR-300M

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE XR324-12M is a fully modular device and has 24 ports.
● 0 fixed ports on the base device
● 24 modular ports via module slots:
12 media modules (optical or electrical as required) can be combined using slots (S1-
S12) depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are
connected according to the modules being used.

Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.

Figure 4-15 SCALANCE XR324-12M with blind covers

Overview of the SCALANCE XR324-12M product

Device: Order number [MLFB]

SCALANCE
XR324-12M (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet front) [6GK5 324-0GG00-1AR2]
XR324-12M (1 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable outlet front) [6GK5 324-0GG00-3AR2]
XR324-12M (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet rear) [6GK5 324-0GG00-1HR2]
XR324-12M (1 x 100 to 240 VAC, cable outlet rear) [6GK5 324-0GG00-3HR2]
XR324-12M TS (2 x 24 VDC, cable outlet front, modules varnished) [6GK5 324-0GG00-1CR2]

SCALANCE X-300
62 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Example of a configuration

CAUTION
Use only approved media modules in the module slots
The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module
slot, but rather on the selected media module.
Refer to the section Media module installation in slot.

Figure 4-16 SCALANCE XR324-12M with MM900

Slot number S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
Media MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM991-2 (SC) MM991-2 (SC) MM991-2 (SC)
modules used
Port number P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
Slot number S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12
Media MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM991-2 MM991-2 MM991-2
modules used
Port number P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 63
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.4 X-300EEC product group

4.2.4.1 Characteristics of the X-300EEC product group

Variants
The SCALANCE X-300EEC is a 19"/2 device with 9 ports for the connection of end devices
or other network segments. There are 2 device types with the following ports:
● SCALANCE X302-7EEC
– 2 x RJ-45 jacks
– 7 x FO ports for multimode fiber, LC connector
● SCALANCE X307-2EEC
– 7 x RJ-45 jacks
– 2 x FO ports for multimode fiber, LC connector

Device versions
The X-300EEC is available in the following alternative versions:
● Power supply
– Power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
– Multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
● Power supply unit
– Single
– Redundant
● Printed board
– Varnished (suitable for aggressive environments)
– Unvarnished
This combination of versions results in the product variants listed in section X-300EEC
product group (Page 26).

SCALANCE X-300
64 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Figure 4-17 SCALANCE X302-7EEC (from below) with protective bracket and LC connector

Replacing the C-PLUG

In the X-300EEC devices, the slot for the C-PLUG is on the top on the housing.

Figure 4-18 C-PLUG of the X-300EEC

CAUTION

The C-PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the power supply to the device is
turned off.
In a device with a varnished printed circuit board, you may only use a C-PLUG with a
varnished board.

To remove the C-PLUG, open the slider and close it again after inserting the C-PLUG.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 65
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Terminal block for signaling contact and power supply

The terminal block of the X-300EEC for connecting the signaling contact and power supply
has the following terminals:
● F1, F2: Signaling contact
The 2 signaling contacts on the device version with a redundant power supply are
energized in parallel.
● L1, M1: Power supply 1
● L2, M2: Power supply 2 (redundant version)
The power supply units for the power supply are available in the following versions:
– 24 to 48 VDC
– As multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC

RJ-45 interface
The RJ-45 ports of the IE Switch X-300EEC are fitted with a securing bracket instead of a
securing collar.
To increase mechanical stability, secure the IE FC RJ-45 PLUGs to this securing bracket
with a cable binder.

LEDs of the X-300EEC

You will find the meaning of the individual LEDs in the section "LED display (Page 147)".

SCALANCE X-300
66 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Ports of the X302-7EEC

The SCALANCE X302-7EEC has the following ports:
● 2 electrical gigabit ports (P8 to P9)
● 7 optical Fast Ethernet ports (P1 to P7)

Figure 4-19 SCALANCE X302-7EEC

Port number P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
Connection type Optical Electrical
Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 67
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Ports of the X307-2EEC

The SCALANCE X307-2EEC has the following ports:
● 7 electrical ports (P3 to P9)
– 5 Fast Ethernet ports (P3 to P7)
– 2 gigabit ports (P8, P9)
● 2 optical Fast Ethernet ports (P1, P2)

Figure 4-20 SCALANCE X307-2EEC

Port number P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
Connection type Optical Electrical Electrical
Fast Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit

SCALANCE X-300
68 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.5 XR-300M EEC product group

4.2.5.1 SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC is a partially modular device and has 24 ports.
● 16 fixed ports in the base device:
16 RJ-45 jacks for connection of end devices or other network segments.
● 8 modular ports via module slots:
4 modules can be combined using slots (S1-S4) depending on the application. End
devices and other network segments are connected according to the modules being
used.

Figure 4-21 XR324-4M_EEC

CAUTION
Use only approved modules in the slots
Possible module connection types:
• 2 x RJ-45
• 2 x FX100
• 2 x FX1000
• or 2 x SFP slots
With FX, single mode fibers or multimode fibers are possible.
Connecting end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module
slots.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 69
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC overview of the variants

IE Switch Order number

SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (1 x 24 V … 48 V, cable outlet front) 6GK5 324-4GG00-1ER2
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (2 x 24 V … 48 V, cable outlet front) 6GK5 324-4GG00-2ER2
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (1 x 100 V to 240 V, cable outlet front) 6GK5 324-4GG00-3ER2
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (2 x 100 V to 240 V, cable outlet front) 6GK5 324-4GG00-4ER2
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (1 x 24 V … 48 V, cable outlet rear) 6GK5 324-4GG00-1JR2
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (2 x 24 V … 48 V, cable outlet rear) 6GK5 324-4GG00-2JR2
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (1 x 100 V to 240 V, cable outlet rear) 6GK5 324-4GG00-3JR2
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC (2 x 100 V to 240 V, cable outlet rear) 6GK5 324-4GG00-4JR2

Slot number S1 S2
Media - MM991-2 (SC) MM991-2 (SC)
modules used
Port number P1 *1) P2 *1) P3 *1) P4 *1) P5*1) P6*1) P7*1) P8*1) P1*) P2*) P1*) P2*)
Slot number S3 S4
Media - MM991-2 MM991-2
modules used
Port number P9 *1) P10 P11*1) P12*1) P13*1) P14*1) P15*1) P16*1) P1*) P2*) P1*) P2*)
*1)
Connection type Fast Ethernet port → no marking
electrical Gigabit Ethernet port → marking *1)
Connection type Fast Ethernet port → marking *2)
optical Gigabit port → marking *3)
Connection type Type of attachment depending on module used → marking*)
Module slot

SCALANCE X-300
70 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.6 Product group X-300M PoE

4.2.6.1 SCALANCE X308-2M PoE product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2M PoE is a partially modular device and has eight ports.
● Four fixed ports in the base device:
Four PoE-compliant ports (RJ-45 jacks with securing collars) for connection of end
devices or other network segments.
● Four modular ports via module slots:
Two media modules (optical or electrical as required) can be combined using slots (S1-
S2) depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are
connected according to the media modules being used.

Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.

Figure 4-22 SCALANCE X308-2M PoE with dummy covers

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 71
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments (example)

CAUTION
Use only approved media modules in the module slots
The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module
slot, but rather on the selected media module.
Refer to the section Media module installation in slot.

Example: Fitted with media modules MM992-2 and MM991-2

Figure 4-23 SCALANCE X308-2M PoE with MM992-2 and MM992-2SFP

Column 1 2 3 4
Slot number - - S1 S2
Media - - MM992-2 MM992-2SFP
modules used
Port number - P1 (gigabit Ethernet) P5 (gigabit multimode fiber- P7
- P2 (gigabit Ethernet) optic cable, SC ports) (interface depends on SFP
used)
- P3 (gigabit Ethernet) P6 (gigabit multimode fiber- P8(interface depends on SFP
- P4 (gigabit Ethernet) optic cable, SC ports) used)

SCALANCE X-300
72 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.7 Product group XR-300M PoE

4.2.7.1 SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE product characteristics

Possible attachments
The SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE is a partially modular device and has 24 ports.
● 16 fixed ports on the base device:
– Eight PoE-compliant gigabit ports (RJ-45 jacks with securing collars) for connection of
end devices or other network segments.
– Eight gigabit ports (RJ-45 jacks with securing collars) for connection of end devices or
other network segments.
● Eight modular ports via module slots:
Four modules can be combined using slots (S1-S4) depending on the application. End
devices and other network segments are connected according to the modules being
used.

Figure 4-24 XR324-4M PoE

CAUTION
Use only approved modules in the slots
Possible module connection types:
• 2 x RJ-45
• 2 x FX100
• 2 x FX1000
• or 2 x SFP slots
With FX, single mode fibers or multimode fibers are possible.
Connecting end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module
slots.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 73
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Slot number S1 S2
Media - MM991-2 (SC) MM991-2 (SC)
modules used
Port number P1 *1) P2 *1) P3 *1) P4 *1) P5*1) P6*1) P7*1) P8*1) P1*) P2*) P1*) P2*)
Slot number S3 S4
Media - MM991-2 MM991-2
modules used
Port number P9 *1) P10 P11*1) P12*1) P13*1) P14*1) P15*1) P16*1) P1*) P2*) P1*) P2*)
*1)
Connection type Fast Ethernet port → no marking
electrical Gigabit Ethernet port → marking *1)
Connection type Fast Ethernet port → marking *2)
optical Gigabit port → marking *3)
Connection type Type of attachment depending on module used → marking*)
Module slot

SCALANCE X-300
74 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.8 MM900 media modules

Possible attachments
The MM992-2CUC media module has the following:
● 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar

Figure 4-25 MM992-2CUC [9922GA]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Possible attachments
The MM992-2CU media module has the following:
● 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 port electrical without securing collar

Figure 4-26 MM992-2CU [9922SA]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 75
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.8.1 MM992-2M12 product characteristics

Possible attachments
The MM992-2M12 media module has the following:
● 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, GE M12 connector electrical

Figure 4-27 MM992-2M12C [9922HA]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Note
Only the media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted with approved SFP transceivers. The
SFP media module can be fitted with up to two SFPs.

Possible attachments
The MM992-2SFP media module has the following:
● 2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP slot

Figure 4-28 MM992-2SFP [9922AS]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

SCALANCE X-300
76 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments
The MM991-2 media module has the following:
● 2 x100 Mbps, BFOC port optical (multimode, glass) up to max. 3 km

Figure 4-29 MM991-2 [9912AB]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Possible attachments
The MM991-2LD media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 26 km

Figure 4-30 MM991-2LD [9912AC]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Possible attachments
The MM991-2 (SC) media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, (multimode glass), up to max. 3 km

Figure 4-31 MM991-2 (SC) [9912AD]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 77
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments
The MM991-2LD (SC) media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 26 km

Figure 4-32 MM991-2LD (SC) [9912AF]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Possible attachments
The MM991-2LH+ (SC) media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 70 km

Figure 4-33 MM991-2LH+ (SC) [9912AE]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Possible attachments
The MM992-2 media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (multimode glass), up to max. 750 m

Figure 4-34 MM992-2 [9922AL]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

SCALANCE X-300
78 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments
The MM992-2LD media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 10 km

Figure 4-35 MM992-2LD [9922AM]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Possible attachments
The MM992-2LH media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 40 km

Figure 4-36 MM992-2LH [9922AN]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

Possible attachments
The MM992-2LH+ media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 70 km

Figure 4-37 MM992-2LH+ [9922AP]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 79
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments
The MM992-2ELH media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 120 km

Figure 4-38 MM992-2ELH [9922AQ]

[Device labeling in square brackets]

4.2.8.2 General notes on MM900

Note
Use media modules only in an approved modular device ("M")
Use an MM900 media module only in a device equipped with suitable slots for such
modules. Example: X308-2M.

SCALANCE X-300
80 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

The MM900 media module decides what can be connected

The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module
slot, but rather on the selected MM900 media module.

Possible attachments Figure

Electrical RJ-45 ports with securing collar

Electrical RJ-45 ports without securing collar

GE M12 connector electrical

BFOC ports optical

Optical SC ports

SFP transceivers
Only the SFP media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted
with approved SFP transceivers. The SFP media module
can be fitted with up to two SFPs.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 81
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

4.2.9 SFP transceiver

Possible attachments
The SFP991-1 transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical (multimode, glass) up to max. 3 km

Figure 4-39 SFP991-1

Possible attachments
The SFP991-1LD transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 26 km

Figure 4-40 SFP991-1LD

Possible attachments
The SFP991-1LH+ transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 70 km

Figure 4-41 SFP991-1LH+

SCALANCE X-300
82 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments
The SFP992-1 transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (multimode, glass) up to max. 750 m

Figure 4-42 SFP992-1

Possible attachments
The SFP992-1LD transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 10 km

Figure 4-43 SFP992-1LD

Possible attachments
The SFP992-1LH transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 40 km

Figure 4-44 SFP992-1LH

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 83
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups

Possible attachments
The SFP992-1LH+ transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 70 km

Figure 4-45 SFP992-1LH+

Possible attachments
The SFP992-1ELH transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 120 km

Figure 4-46 SFP992-1ELH

4.2.9.1 General notes on SFP

Note
Only the media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted with approved SFP transceivers. The
SFP media module can be fitted with up to two SFPs.

Device: (Variant) [Order number] Figure

Media module Labeling on the device
MM992-2SFP (2 x 100/1000 Mbps, [6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0]
SFP media module) 9922AS

SCALANCE X-300
84 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

Note
An SFP with multimode has a black clip and an SFP with single mode has a blue clip. To
protect the pins, these are fitted with a dummy plug.

4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

4.3.1 Ethernet interfaces - electrical ports

4.3.1.1 10Base-T / 100Base-TX

Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the electrical ports is 10 Mbps or as Fast Ethernet ports 100 Mbps.

Transmission mode
The transmission mode for 10Base-T / 100Base-TX is specified in the IEEE 802.3i / IEEE
802.3u standards of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
Autonegotiation (automatic detection of the best transmission modes) is default. The order in
which they are selected is:
● 100Base-TX full duplex
● 100Base-TX half duplex
● 10Base-T full duplex
● 10Base-T half duplex
Two communication modes are possible:
● Half duplex
Two-way alternate transmission mode - it is only possible to either send or receive over
the interfaces at any one time.
● Full duplex mode
Two-way simultaneous - both communication partners can send and receive at the same
time.
Connections to other switches can use half or full duplex; connections to hubs are possible
only in half duplex mode.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 85
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

Transmission medium
Data transmission at 10 Mbps and at 100 Mbps is over two wire pairs (pin 1, 2, 3, 6) of the
twisted pair cable. For 10 Mbps, at least a category 3 (Cat 3) and for 100 Mbps, at least a
four-wire (2 x 2) category 5 (Cat 5) cable is necessary.

Transmission range
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 100 m.

Connectors
A node or network segment is connected to an 8-pin RJ-45 jack with securing collar. Due to
its flush fitting with an IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 / IE FC RJ45 Plug 145 connector, the securing
collar ensures a robust connection suitable for industry that provides tensile and bending
strain relief for the inserted connector.

Note
The RJ-45 jacks of the SCALANCE X300EEC variants do not have a securing collar. The
tensile and bending relief are provided by the securing bracket using a cable binder, see also
section Signaling contact (Page 140).

SCALANCE X-300
86 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

4.3.1.2 1000Base-T

Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the electrical Ethernet ports is 10 Mbps, as Fast Ethernet ports 100
Mbps or as gigabit ports 1 Gbps.

Transmission mode
The transmission mode for 1000Base-T is specified in the IEEE 802.3ab standard.
Autonegotiation (automatic detection of the best transmission mode) is default.
The order in which they are selected is:
● 1000Base-T full duplex
● 1000Base-T half duplex
● 100Base-TX full duplex
● 100Base-TX half duplex
● 10Base-T full duplex
● 10Base-T half duplex
Two communication modes are possible:
● Half duplex
Two-way alternate transmission mode - it is only possible to either send or receive over
the interfaces at any one time.
● Full duplex mode
Two-way simultaneous - both communication partners can send and receive at the same
time.

Transmission medium
Data is transmitted over an eight-wire twisted pair cable.

NOTICE

For data transmission at 1 Gbps, at least a Cat 5e twisted-pair cable with 4 x 2 wires is
necessary. With a four-wire cable (2 x 2 wires), a maximum data transmission rate of 100
Mbps is possible.

Transmission range
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 100 m.

Connectors
The connectors used are 8-pin RJ-45 jacks.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 87
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

4.3.1.3 Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Power over Ethernet (PoE)

With PoE, the power for networked devices is carried via Ethernet. Here, there are two
methods of supplying power:
● Alternative A
Here, the voltage is transferred on the data wires 1, 2, 3 and 6 of the Ethernet cable
Requirements for the Ethernet cable:
– For 10Base-T/100Base-TX, a 4-wire cable is adequate for data transmission and
power supply.
– With 1000BASE-T, an 8-wire cable is necessary for data transmission.
● Alternative B
Power is transferred on the free wires 4, 5, 7 and 8 of the Ethernet cable.
Requirements for the Ethernet cable: For 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000BASE-T, an 8-wire
cable is needed.
PoE-compliant devices can be divided into the following groups:
● PSE - power sourcing equipment
These inject power onto the Ethernet cable.
● PD - powered devices
These are supplied with power via Ethernet.

4.3.1.4 Ports of the X308-2M PoE

The PoE ports of the switch

As a PSE, the X308-2M PoE supplies PoE-compliant devices with power over Ethernet. The
48 V power required to supply the powered devices is generated internally on the switch, no
extra power supply unit is necessary.
The X308-2M PoE uses the "alternative A" for this. Per RJ-45 port, a maximum of 15.4 W
are available for supplying a PoE-compliant device. If a Cat5/Cat5e cable with a maximum
length of 100 m is used, the connected device can be supplied with a power of 12.95 W.

Note
The total power provided by the SCALANCE X308-2M PoE on all four PoE ports is a
maximum of 30.8 W.

The PoE ports meet the conditions listed in the IEEE 802.3af / IEEE 802.3at standard
(type 1) for environment A , in other words power supply over Ethernet within a power supply
system. For details of configuring and enabling PoE for individual ports, refer to the
configuration manual SCALANCE X-300 / X-400 on the accompanying CD.

SCALANCE X-300
88 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

Possible attachments
The X308-2M PoE is a partially modular device and has 4 fixed ports and 2 slots for media
modules.
● 4 electrical ports
4 PoE-compliant RJ-45 jacks with securing collars for connection of end devices or
network segments. Non PoE-compliant end devices can also be connected to the PoE-
compliant RJ-45 jacks because the X308-2M PoE checks that the end devices are
suitable for the PoE function before applying the power.
● 4 modular ports via 2 module slots
2 media modules each with 2 ports are combined optically or electrically via the slots S1
and S2 depending on the application.
End devices and other network segments are connected according to the media modules
being used.

4.3.1.5 Ports of the XR-300M PoE

The PoE ports of the switch

As a PSE, the XR324-4M PoE supplies PoE-compliant devices with power over Ethernet.
The power required to supply the powered devices is generated internally on the switch, no
extra power supply unit is necessary.
The XR324-4M PoE uses "alternative A" for this. Per RJ-45 port, a maximum of 15.4 W are
available for supplying a PoE-compliant device. If a Cat5/Cat5e cable with a maximum
length of 100 m is used, the connected device can be supplied with a power of 12.95 W.

Note
The total power provided by the SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE on all eight PoE ports is a
maximum of 53.2 W.

The PoE ports meet the conditions listed in the IEEE 802.3af / IEEE 802.3at standard
(type 1) for environment A , in other words power supply over Ethernet within a power supply
system. For details of configuring and enabling PoE for individual ports, refer to the
configuration manual SCALANCE X-300 / X-400 on the accompanying CD.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 89
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

Possible attachments
The XR324-4M PoE is a partially modular device and has 16 fixed ports and 4 slots for
media modules.
● 16 electrical ports
– Ports P1 to P8
8 PoE-compliant RJ-45 jacks with securing collars for connection of end devices or
network segments
– Ports P9 to P16
8 RJ-45 jacks with securing collars for connection of end devices or network segments
(no PoE)
Non PoE-compliant end devices can also be connected to the PoE-compliant RJ-45 jacks
because the XR324-4M PoE checks that the end devices are suitable for the PoE
function before applying the power.
● 8 modular ports via 4 module slots
4 media modules each with 2 ports are combined optically or electrically via the slots S1
to S4 depending on the application.
End devices and other network segments are connected according to the media modules
being used.

4.3.1.6 Isolation between the TP ports

All ports meet the requirement of 1.5 kV isolation voltage to the shield and between the ports
(corresponds to IEEE802.3, Environment B).

Note
Exceptions are X307-3, X307-3LD, X308-2, X308-2LD, X308-2LH, X308-2LH+, X310,
X310FE
The following port group is an exception to this:
• Port group 1: P1, P2, P3 and P4
Between the ports of port group 1, the requirements for Environment A are met.

SCALANCE X-300
90 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

4.3.2 Ethernet interfaces - optical ports

4.3.2.1 1000Base-SX

Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the optical gigabit ports is 1 Gbps.

Transmission mode
Transmission with 1000Base-SX is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard and is specified as
1000 Mbps transmission rate and full duplex.

Transmission medium
Data is transmitted over multimode FOC. The wavelength is 850 nm.
The core diameter of the multimode FOC is 50 µm; the light source is an LED. Many modes
(light beams) are used for signal transmission. The propagation times of the light pulses
(dispersion) restrict the maximum range considerably.

Transmission range
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 750 m when using SIMATIC NET
fiber-optic multimode FOC with SC duplex connectors.

Connectors
SC duplex female connectors are used.
On the IE Switches X-300EEC, devices are connected via LC jacks.

4.3.2.2 1000Base-LX / 100Base-FX

Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the optical gigabit ports is 1 Gbps.

Transmission mode
Transmission with 1000Base-LX is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard and is specified as
1000 Mbps transmission rate and full duplex.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 91
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches

Transmission medium
Data is transmitted over single mode FOC. The wavelength is 1310 nm or 1550 nm.
The core diameter of the single mode FO cable is 9 or 10 µm; the light source is a laser
diode. To transmit a signal, only one mode (light beam) is used greatly reducing dispersion.
As a result, the maximum range of single mode FOC is greater than that of multimode FOC.

Transmission range
The maximum transmission distance (segment length) is 120 km for 1000Base-LX
transmission.

IE Switches X-300 connector technology

SC duplex female connectors are used.

Connector technology of the IE Switch X-300EEC

FC duplex female connectors with the following characteristics are used:
● Maximum range: up to 3 km
● Wavelength: 1310 nm
● Transmission mode: Multimode
● Standard: 100Base-FX

4.3.3 Signaling contact

The signaling contact (relay contact) is a floating switch with which error/fault states can be
signaled by breaking the contact.

Error indication
● The signaling by the signaling contact is synchronized with the fault LED, in other words,
all errors displayed by this LED (freely configurable) are also signaled on the signaling
contact.
● If an internal fault occurs, the fault LED lights up and the signaling contact opens.
● The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does
not lead to an error message.
● The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the
current status is entered in the fault mask as the new desired status.

SCALANCE X-300
92 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)

4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)

CAUTION

DO NOT REMOVE C-PLUG WHILE POWER IS ON

The C-PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the power supply to the device is
turned off.
In a device with a varnished printed circuit board, you may only use a C-PLUG with a
varnished board.

Area of application
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration data of the IE
Switch and ships with the product. This means that the configuration data remains available
if the IE Switch is replaced.

How it works
Power is supplied by the IE Switch. The C-PLUG retains all data permanently when the
power is turned off.
If an empty C-PLUG (factory settings or deleted with the Clean function) is inserted, all the
configuration data of the IE Switch is saved to it automatically when the device starts up.
Changes to the configuration during operation without operator intervention are saved on the
C-PLUG if this is in the "ACCEPTED" status.
An IE Switch with an accepted C-PLUG inserted uses the configuration data of the C-PLUG
automatically when it starts up. Acceptance is possible only when the data was written by a
compatible device type.
This allows an IE Switch to be replaced quickly and simply. The C-PLUG is taken from the
failed component and inserted in the replacement. The first time it is started up, the
replacement device has the same configuration as the failed device except for the MAC
address set by the vendor.

Diagnostics
Inserting a C-PLUG that does not contain the configuration of a compatible device type,
accidentally removing the C-PLUG or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are signaled by
the diagnostics mechanisms of the IE Switch (LEDs, WEB-based management, SNMP, CLI
and PROFINET diagnostics).

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 93
Description of the device
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)

Inserting in the C-PLUG slot on the IE Switch X-300

Product group Slot Figure C-PLUG

X-300 Rear of the device 1. Remove the screw cover.
X-300M 2. Insert the C-PLUG in the intended slot.
3. Close the screw cover again correctly.

XR-300M Rear of the device 1. Remove the cover.

- right 2. Insert the C-PLUG in the intended slot.
3. Close the cover again correctly.

X-300EEC Top of the housing 1. Open the slider.

2. Insert the C-PLUG.
3. Close the slider.

SCALANCE X-300
94 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)

Removing the C-PLUG from the IE Switch X-300

It is only necessary to remove the C-PLUG if the IE Switch develops a fault.
The C-PLUG can be removed from the slot using flat pliers, tweezers, or a small screwdriver.

Product group Slot Figure

X-300 Rear of the device 1. Remove the screw cover.
X-300M 2. Remove the C-PLUG.
3. Close the screw cover again correctly.

XR-300M Rear of the device 1. Remove the cover.

- right 2. Remove the C-PLUG.
3. Close the cover again correctly.

X-300EEC Top of the housing 1. Open the slider.

2. Remove the C-PLUG.
3. Close the slider.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 95
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product

4.5 Components of the product

Unpacking, checking
1. Make sure that the package is complete.
2. Check all the parts for transport damage.

WARNING

Do not use any parts that show evidence of damage!

4.5.1 Components of the product

The following components are supplied with a SCALANCE X-300:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium.
● A four-pin terminal block for the 24 VDC power supply.
● A two-pin terminal block for the signaling contact.
● Operating Instructions (compact)
● Product CD with documentation and software.

4.5.2 X-300M components of the product

Note
When shipped, all devices have a C-PLUG exchangeable medium.

Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.

Note
Labels to identify the installed MM900 media modules are supplied with the modular devices
(M).

SCALANCE X-300
96 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product

Table 4- 1 Overview of the components shipped with the X-300M product group

Device: Variant Plug-in terminal block Device BAK Product CD

SCALANCE Signaling Power supply
contact
X308-2M (-) 2-pin 4-pin (24 V) ● ● ●
X308-2M TS (-) 2-pin 4-pin (12 V) ● ● ●

4.5.3 Components of the XR-300M product

Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have dummy covers fitted.

Note
Labels to identify the installed MM900 media modules are supplied with the modular devices
(M).

The following parts ship with a SCALANCE XR-300M:

● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium.
● 2 mounting brackets and 8 screws (M3x5 recessed head, drive: Torx) for 19" rack
mounting.
● A two-pin terminal block for the signaling contact.
● Connecting cable for the diagnostics port.
● Adhesive feet for desktop operation.
● Operating Instructions (compact)
● Product CD with documentation and software.
For devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply also:
● A two-pin connector for the power supply.
For devices with a 24 VDC power supply, also:
● A four-pin terminal block for the power supply.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 97
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product

4.5.4 X-300EEC product components

Apart from the device itself, the following components are also supplied with the switch:

Table 4- 2 Overview of the components shipped with the X-300EEC product group

Device: Components of the product

SCALANCE C-PLUG Plug-in terminal block BAK 1 Product CD
(variants)
Signaling Power
contact with DC 100
contact pins 24 to to 240 V AC /
48 V 60
to 250 V DC
X302-7EEC
1 x power supply unit 24 VDC, ● 1 x 2-pin 1 x 4-pin - ● ●
2 x power supply unit 24 VDC ● 2 x 2-pin 2 x 4-pin - ● ●
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC ● 1 x 3-pin - 1 x 3-pin ● ●
/ 60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC ● 2 x 3-pin - 2 x 3-pin ● ●
/ 60 to 250 VDC
X307-2EEC
1 x power supply unit 24 VDC ● 1 x 2-pin 1 x 4-pin - ● ●
2 x power supply unit 24 VDC ● 2 x 2-pin 2 x 4-pin - ● ●
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC ● 1 x 3-pin - 1 x 3-pin ● ●
/ 60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC ● 2 x 3-pin - 2 x 3-pin ● ●
/ 60 to 250 VDC
1 BAK: Operating Instructions (compact) on paper

4.5.5 Components of the XR-300M EEC product

Note
• When shipped, all devices have a C-PLUG exchangeable medium.
• When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.
• Labels to identify the installed MM900 media modules are supplied with the modular
devices.

The consignment of a SCALANCE XR-300M EEC consist of the device itself and the
following parts:
● 2 mounting brackets and 8 screws (M3x5 recessed head, drive: Torx) for 19" rack
installation
● Connecting cable for the diagnostics port
● Operating Instructions (compact) SCALANCE XR-300 M EEC.

SCALANCE X-300
98 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product

● Product CD with documentation and software

● With devices with power supply 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
– A 3-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the
signaling contacts.
– A 3-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the
power supply.
● With devices with 24 to 48 VDC power supply:
– A 2-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the
signaling contacts.
– A 4-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the
power supply.

4.5.6 Components of the X308-2M PoE product

Interfaces

Type RJ-45 port electrical Module slots

10/100/1000 Mbps
X308-2M PoE 4 2

Components of the product

The following parts ship with a SCALANCE X-300M PoE:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium
● 4-pin terminal block for the power supply
● 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
● Operating Instructions (compact)
● Product CD with documentation and software

Order numbers

Type Order number

X308-2M PoE 6GK5 308-2QG00-2AA2

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 99
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product

4.5.7 Components of the XR-324-4M PoE product

Components of the product

The following parts ship with a SCALANCE XR-324-4M PoE:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium
● 2 mounting brackets and 8 screws (M3x5 recessed head, drive: Torx) for 19" rack
installation
● Connecting cable for the diagnostics port
● Operating Instructions (compact)
● Product CD with documentation and software
● For devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply:
– A 2-pin terminal block for the power supply
– A 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
● With devices with 24 V DC power supply:
– 4-pin terminal block for the power supply
– 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
– 4 adhesive feet for desktop mounting

4.5.8 Components shipped with the MM900 product

The following components are supplied with a SCALANCE MM900 media module:
● MM99x-2xx media module
● Operating Instructions (compact)

Note
Identification labels
The location labels identify the media modules and ship with the SCALANCE device.

SCALANCE X-300
100 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product

4.5.9 Components shipped with the SFP product

Table 4- 3 Overview of the components shipped with the SFP product group

Device: (Variant) Plug-in terminal block Device BAK Product CD

Transceiver (signaling (24V)
contact) 4-pin
2-pin
SFP991-1 (-) - - ● ● -
SFP991-1LD (-) - - ● ● -
SFP991-1LH+ (-) - - ● ● -
SFP992-1 (-) - - ● ● -
SFP992-1LD (-) - - ● ● -
SFP992-1LH (-) - - ● ● -
SFP992-LH+ (-) - - ● ● -
SFP992-1ELH (-) - - ● ● -

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 101
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product

SCALANCE X-300
102 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Installation 5
You will find detailed instructions on connecting up the power supply and the signaling
contact in the section Connecting (Page 125).

WARNING
Installation guidelines and safety notices
When installing and operating the device, keep to the installation instructions and safety-
related notices as described here (section Safety instructions (Page 13)) and in the manual
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks (see Preface
(Page 3)).
Installation location and temperatures above 55 °C
When installing the device, select a location where only qualified service personnel or
trained users have access to it.
If the device is operated in an ambient temperature of more than 55 °C, the temperature of
the device housing may be higher than 70 °C.
Provide suitable shade to protect the IE Switch X-300 against direct sunlight. This avoids
unnecessary warming of the IE Switches X-300 and prevents premature aging of the
IE Switch X-300 and cabling.
Use of approved components
• Use only approved components, for example supporting brackets, SFPs, 19 inch racks.
• Create any supports you require according the drawings in section Graphics
(Page 279).

Unless stated otherwise, the mounting options listed below apply to all IE Switch X-300.

Mounting position of the IE Switch X-300EEC

CAUTION

Only the normal mounting position with the cable outlets downwards is permitted.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 103
Installation
5.1 Overview of the methods of installation

Minimum clearances
If you install the IE Switch X-300EEC in enclosures without forced ventilation or cooling,
minimum clearances must be maintained to neighboring devices or the wall of the enclosure.
By keeping to the minimum clearances, there is then an adequate stream of air for heat
dissipation during operation. Keep to the following minimum clearances to neighboring
devices.

Table 5- 1 Minimum clearances when installing the X-300EEC

Minimum clearance to devices below the switch 100 mm

Minimum clearance to devices above the switch 100 mm
Minimum clearance at the sides 20 mm

5.1 Overview of the methods of installation

Installing the switches

IE Switches X-300 can be installed in various ways:
● Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
● Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
● Wall mounting
● 19" rack mounting (SCALANCE XR300)
For the possible types of installation, refer to section Technical specifications (Page 153)

Note
Standard rail and wall mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC
With the X-300EEC, note the special features in the relevant subsection on standard rail or
wall mounting.

Media modules and SFP transceivers

Media modules and SFP transceivers are used in modular devices.
● Media modules are used in the appropriate slots of the switch.
● SFP transceivers are used only in SFP media modules.

SCALANCE X-300
104 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

5.2 Installing a switch

CAUTION
Electrical connections
Make sure that the power supply of the switch is turned off when fitting the connectors for
the power supply and the signaling contacts.

For information on the electrical connections, refer to Section Connecting (Page 125).

5.2.1 Installation on a DIN rail

WARNING
No installation on a 35 mm DIN rail in shipbuilding
In ships, the 35 mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.
This applies to all devices with this notice in the "Installation options" table in the section
"Technical specifications" (subsection, "Construction, installation and environment").

Installation
Install the IE Switch X-300 on a 35 mm DIN rail complying with IEC 60715.
1. Hang the IE Switch X-300 on the DIN rail and then push it in against the rail until it clips
into place.
2. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the description in the section
Connecting the grounding (Page 126).
3. Fit the connectors for the power supply.
4. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact.
5. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the IE Switch X-300.

Figure 5-1 Mounting an IE Switch X-300 on a DIN rail (35 mm)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 105
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Uninstalling
To remove an IE Switch X-300 from the DIN rail:
1. Disconnect all cables from the switch.
2. Release the lower part of the IE Switch X-300 from the DIN rail with a screwdriver and
pull the lower part of the switch away from the DIN rail.

Figure 5-2 Removing an IE Switch X-300 from a DIN rail (35 mm)

DIN rail mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC

CAUTION
Grounding
The device is grounded via the bolts in the floor of the housing. Grounding via the DIN rail
alone is not adequate.
On the X-300EEC with power supply 100...240 V AC, you must always connect protective
ground via the bolts on the bottom of the device housing.

Removing the IE Switch X-300EEC

1. Push the X-300EEC down.
2. Swing the device upwards.
No tools are necessary for removing the device.

SCALANCE X-300
106 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

5.2.2 Installation on a standard rail

Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail

1. Hang the upper guide at the top of the switch housing onto the S7 standard rail.
2. Screw the IE Switch X-300 to the underside of the standard rail.
3. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the description in the section
Connecting the grounding (Page 126).
4. Connect the power supply to the appropriate terminal block.
5. Connect the cable for the signaling contact to the appropriate terminal block.
6. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the IE Switch X-300.

Note
Standard rail mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC
The IE Switch X-300EEC can only be mounted on an S7-300 standard rail using a
commercially available adapter.

Figure 5-3 Installing an IE Switch X-300 on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail

CAUTION
Grounding of the X-300EEC
The device is grounded via the bolts in the floor of the housing.
On the X-300EEC with power supply 100...240 V AC, you must always connect
protective ground via the bolts on the bottom of the device housing.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 107
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Uninstalling
To remove an IE Switch X-300 from the SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail, follow these steps:
1. Disconnect all connected cables.
2. Loosen the screws on the underside of the standard rail and lift the IE Switch X-300 away
from the rail.

5.2.3 Wall mounting

Wall mounting

Note
Installation fittings
When mounting on a wall, use mounting fittings suitable for the type of wall. For example, to
secure to concrete:
• 4 wall plugs, 6 mm in diameter and 30 mm long
• 4 screws 3.5 mm in diameter and 40 mm long
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the
IE Switch X-300.

1. Mount the switch on the wall.

2. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the description in the section
Connecting the grounding (Page 126).
3. Connect the power supply to the appropriate terminal block.
4. Connect the cable for the signaling contact to the appropriate terminal block.
5. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the IE Switch X-300.

CAUTION
Grounding of the X-300EEC
The device is grounded via the bolts in the floor of the housing.
On the X-300EEC with power supply 100...240 V AC, you must always connect protective
ground via the bolts on the bottom of the device housing.

Note
For precise dimensions, refer to the dimension drawings in section Graphics (Page 279).

SCALANCE X-300
108 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Note
Wall mounting of a rack device
For wall mounting of a rack device (R), use suitable fittings such as a mounting bracket.
Wall mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC
To mount the IE Switch X-300EEC on a wall, you require an additional securing bracket. You
will find the dimensions for a suitable securing bracket in section Graphics (Page 279).

5.2.4 19" rack mounting

WARNING
Use of approved components
• Use only approved 19" cabinets.
• Use only supplied mounting brackets.
There are several ways of fixing the mounting brackets depending on the mounting
position required.

19" rack mounting

19" rack mounting is possible for all rack devices identified by (XR).
Refer to the technical specifications, Installation options table for each product group. The
rack device (R) is installed using two mounting brackets fitted to the front. After fitting the two
mounting brackets, the rack device can then be installed in a 19" cabinet.

CAUTION
Do not cover the ventilation grilles
During installation, select a mounting position so that the ventilation grilles are always free
to achieve adequate cooling. In the standard position, the ventilation grilles are on the top,
bottom and sides of the housing.
If you install more than one rack device, make sure that the permitted ambient conditions
are met for all devices in the rack.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 109
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Minimum clearances
If you install the IE Switch in rack devices without forced ventilation or cooling, minimum
clearances must be maintained to neighboring devices or the wall of the enclosure. By
keeping to the minimum clearances, there is then an adequate stream of air for heat
dissipation during operation. Keep to the following minimum clearances to neighboring
devices.

Table 5- 2 Minimum clearances for installation in rack devices

Minimum clearance to devices below the switch 100 mm

Minimum clearance to devices above the switch 100 mm

CAUTION
Four-point mounting
If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more
detailed information in the section "Mechanical stability in operation".

SCALANCE X-300
110 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Standard position

Normal orientation of the device

• The ventilation grilles are on the top, bottom and sides of the
housing.
• The LED display is on the left of the front panel of the
housing.
• To the right of the LED display, the SCALANCE XR-300 has
connectors for the signaling contacts and the power supply.
Note that the SCALANCE XR-300 is available for different
power supplies (100 to 240 V AC and 24 V DC variants).

• The Ethernet ports or the slots for the modules are also on
the front of the housing. Slots for the modules are fitted with
dummy covers.
• The C-PLUG is on the right behind a protective panel
secured with screws.
(For more detailed information, refer to the section on the C-
PLUG in the X-300 operating instructions.)

• On the back of the housing, you will find the diagnostics port
of the device. (For more details, refer to Diagnostics port
XR-300.) On the SCALANCE X-300M EEC, you will also
find the connectors for the signaling contacts and power
supply here.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 111
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

19" rack mounting with standard orientation

19" rack mounting

1. Select the required rack device (R) and the 19" cabinet.
2. Fix the two mounting brackets with 4 screws each to the
sides of the housing. The maximum tightening torque for
these screws is 0.5 Nm.

CAUTION: If you install a rack device (R) with

components inserted.
The locking mechanisms of components installed in the
rack device (R) (for example the handles of media
modules or the clips on the SFP) must be closed.
See also installation of modular devices:
- Installing media modules in a slot
- Installing an SFP in an SFP media module.
3. Insert the rack device (R) in the 19" cabinet and hold the
rack device (R) at the required height. Make sure that
nothing is obstructing air from entering the ventilation
grilles.
Fit the securing screws to the two mounting brackets to
secure the rack device (R) in the 19" cabinet.
4. Connect the grounding bolts. On the SCALANCE X-
300EEC, the PE connector is on the bottom of the
device. On the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the PE
connector is on the rear of the device between the
power connectors.
5. Fit the connectors for the power supply.
Note that the SCALANCE X-300 is available for different
power supplies (100 to 240 VAC and 24 VDC variants).
6. Fit the remaining connectors, for example the signaling
contact.

Example of individual installation

Note
Individual installation of the SCALANCE XR-300M
Devices of the XR-300M category can also be installed upright in a cabinet door. In this
case, the LED display is at the front and the cable outlet at the back of the cabinet door.
Make sure that the mounting bracket is correctly positioned on the rack device (R) so that
the rack device (R) can be mounted securely on the cabinet door.

SCALANCE X-300
112 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Desktop operation (only 24 V DC variants with adhesive feet)

CAUTION
No desktop operation for devices with 100 to 240 V AC power supply
Desktop operation is permitted only for the 24 V DC variants of the rack devices (R).
The adhesive feet ship with the 24 V DC variants. The permitted ambient temperature for
desktop operation is -40 °C to +50 °C.

Desktop operation (only 24 V DC variants with adhesive feet)

1. Select the required 24 V variant of the rack device (R).
2. Lay out the four adhesive feet in preparation.
Check the rack device (R) you are installing; for example
that the two mounting brackets are fitted at the front and
that the ventilation grilles are free.

CAUTION: If you install a rack device (R) with

components inserted.
The locking mechanisms of components installed in the
rack device (R) (for example the handles of media
modules or the clips on the SFP) must be closed.
See also installation of modular devices:
- Installing media modules in a slot
- Installing an SFP in an SFP media module.
4. Turn the rack device (R) over and fit the four adhesive
feet on the base.
5. Fit the connectors for the 24 V power supply.
6. Fit the remaining connectors, for example the signaling
contact.

Removal

Removing from the rack

1. Turn off the power supply for the SCALANCE XR-300M.
2. Disconnect all cables for data traffic and the connectors for the power supply and the grounding cable.
3. Undo the screws on the mounting bracket and remove the rack device (R) from the 19" cabinet.
If necessary, release the locking mechanisms of components inserted in the rack device (R) (for example handles
on the media module or clips on the SFP) to be able to remove the media modules (MM900) or the transceiver
(SFP).

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 113
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

5.2.5 19" rack mounting - X-300EEC product group

The X-300EEC can be installed in a rack singly or as pairs.
● Mounting singly:
To do this, an X-300EEC device is secured to a plate and screwed into the 19" rack.
● Mounting as pairs:
Here, two X-300EEC devices are fastened together with plates before installation in the
rack:
– 1 plate as middle section (6 screws)
– 2 plates on the outside (3 screws each)
You will find dimension drawings of the plates in section X-300EEC dimension
drawings (Page 289).

Figure 5-4 Rack mounting of two IE-Switches X-300EEC fastened together

Figure at top: Rear of the switches
Figure at bottom: View from below

SCALANCE X-300
114 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Table 5- 3 Legend for rack mounting of two IE-Switches X-300EEC fastened together

No. Name
1 Plate for side
2 Spring washer
3 Hexagonal nut
5 Side section (the side panel should be under slight tension)
7 IE Switch X-300EEC

5.2.6 19" rack mounting - XR-300M EEC product group

WARNING
Use of approved components
• Use only approved 19" cabinets.
• Use only supplied mounting brackets.
There are several ways of fixing the mounting brackets depending on the mounting
position required.

Grounding

WARNING
PE connection with X-300EEC and XR-300EEC
Grounding simply via the housing is inadequate. For safe operation, the protective ground
must be connected to the grounding bolts.
On the SCALANCE X-300EEC, the PE connector is on the bottom of the device. On the
SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the PE connector is on the rear of the device between the
power connectors.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 115
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

19" rack mounting

19" rack mounting is possible for all rack devices identified by (XR).
Refer to the technical specifications, Installation options table for each product group. The
rack device is installed using two mounting brackets fitted to the front. After fitting the two
mounting brackets, the rack device can then be installed in a 19" cabinet.

CAUTION
Do not cover the ventilation grilles
During installation, select a mounting position so that the ventilation grilles are always free
to achieve adequate cooling. In the standard position, the ventilation grilles are on the top,
bottom and sides of the housing.
If you install more than one rack device, make sure that the permitted ambient conditions
are met for all devices in the rack.

Minimum clearances
If you install the IE Switch in rack devices without forced ventilation or cooling, minimum
clearances must be maintained to neighboring devices or the wall of the enclosure. By
keeping to the minimum clearances, there is then an adequate stream of air for heat
dissipation during operation. Keep to the following minimum clearances to neighboring
devices.

Table 5- 4 Minimum clearances for installation in rack devices

Minimum clearance to devices below the switch 100 mm

Minimum clearance to devices above the switch 100 mm

CAUTION
Four-point mounting
If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more
detailed information in the section "Mechanical stability in operation".

SCALANCE X-300
116 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

Standard position

Normal orientation of the device

• The ventilation grilles are on the top, bottom and sides of the
housing.
• The LED display is on the left of the front panel of the
housing.
• To the right of the LED display, the SCALANCE XR-300 has
connectors for the signaling contacts and the power supply.
Note that the SCALANCE XR-300 is available for different
power supplies (100 to 240 VAC and 24 VDC variants).

• The Ethernet ports or the slots for the modules are also on
the front of the housing. Slots for the modules are fitted with
dummy covers.
• The C-PLUG is on the right behind a protective panel
secured with screws.
(For more detailed information, refer to the section on the C-
PLUG in the X-300 operating instructions.)

• On the back of the housing, you will find the diagnostics port
of the device. (For more details, refer to Diagnostics port
XR-300.) On the SCALANCE X-300M EEC, you will also
find the connectors for the signaling contacts and power
supply here.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 117
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch

19" rack mounting with standard orientation

19" rack mounting

1. Select the required rack device and the 19" cabinet.
2. Fix the two mounting brackets with 4 screws each to the
sides of the housing. The maximum tightening torque for
these screws is 0.5 Nm.

CAUTION: If you install a rack device with components

inserted.
The locking mechanisms of components installed in the
rack device (for example the handles of media modules
or the clips on the SFP) must be closed.
See also installation of modular devices:
- Installing media modules in a slot
- Installing an SFP in an SFP media module.
4. Insert the rack device in the 19" cabinet and hold the
rack device at the required height. Make sure that
nothing is obstructing air from entering the ventilation
grilles.
Fit the securing screws to the two mounting brackets to
secure the rack device in the 19" cabinet.
5. Connect the grounding bolts. On the SCALANCE X-
300EEC, the PE connector is on the bottom of the
device. On the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the PE
connector is on the rear of the device between the
power connectors.
6. Fit the connectors for the power supply.
Note that the SCALANCE X-300 is available for different
power supplies (100 to 240 VAC and 24 VDC variants).
7. Fit the remaining connectors, for example the signaling
contact.

Removal

Removing from the rack

1. Turn off the power supply for the SCALANCE XR-300M.
2. Disconnect all cables for data traffic and the connectors for the power supply and the grounding cable.
3. Undo the screws on the mounting bracket and remove the rack device from the 19" cabinet.
If necessary, release the locking mechanisms of components inserted in the rack device (for example handles on
the media module or clips on the SFP) to be able to remove the media modules (MM900) or the transceiver (SFP).

SCALANCE X-300
118 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers

5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers

5.3.1 Installation and removal of media modules

Connecting media modules and SFP transceivers

CAUTION
Use only approved SFPs
If you use components not approved by Siemens AG, in particular SFPs, Siemens cannot
accept any responsibility for the correct functioning of the "Ethernet switch system"
according to the specification.
Moreover, if components are used that have not been Siemens approved, Siemens cannot
vouch for their compatibility or for risk-free use of these components.

WARNING
Install and remove media modules only when the power is off
Media modules may only be inserted in or removed from a SCALANCE device when the
power supply to the device has been turned off.
Use only approved media modules
Use only "MM900" media modules in the module slots of SCALANCE devices.

NOTICE
Use media modules only in an approved modular device
Use an MM900 media module only for a device equipped with suitable slots for such
modules. Example: X308-2M.
The names and labeling of the media modules differ
• Example: The device is called, for example, "MM992-2SFP" [6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0],
the labeling on the device is "9922AS". You will find detailed information on the labeling
of the media modules in the "MM900 media modules" compact operating instructions.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 119
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers

CAUTION
Remember the orientation of media modules.
On modular devices, there are always two module slots arranged opposite each other.
Remember the correct orientation when installing MM900 media modules.
Example:
• The first MM900 media module is installed in slot 3.
• The second MM900 media module installed in slot 4 must be turned through 180
degrees.
On modular devices for rack mounting, pairs of module slots are located one above the
other in which modules can be inserted in a specific order:
Example of a rack device:
• The first MM900 media module is installed in slot 1.
• The second MM900 media module installed in slot 7 must be turned through 180
degrees.
Other modules are then inserted in slots 2 and 8 or 3 and 9 etc.
The permitted operating temperature is decided by the fully equipped device (switch +
media module + SFP transceiver).
With modular devices, it is not only the switch that decides the permitted operating
temperature of the overall device but also the temperature ranges of the MM900 media
modules and the SFP transceivers. You will find details in the technical specifications of the
relevant components.
The following aspects can restrict the maximum permitted operating temperature:
• The orientation of the carrier device.
• The use of SFP transceivers.
• The use of transceivers of the types LH, LH+ or ELH.

Note
SFP transceivers with the SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC
In contrast to the information in the product documentation for the SCALANCE MM900,
MM992-2SFP media modules can be operated in the SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC at
ambient temperatures up to a maximum of 70 °C if the following requirements are met:
• MM992-2SFP media modules as of hardware product version 02 are suitable. The
hardware product version can be found on the device. You can also read out this
information with the WBM or the CLI.
• Only the following SFP transceivers may be used:
– SFP991-1
– SFP991-1LD
– SFP992-1
– SFP992-1LD

SCALANCE X-300
120 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers

NOTICE
Slot number
With modular devices, the MM900 media modules must be given a slot number.
The slot number labels are supplied with the modular devices.

Installing a media module

The media module is inserted with the handle pulled out. When the handle is inserted, the
media module is locked in the device.

Note
The figures in the following installation instructions show the installation of a media module in
a rack device. The procedure for installation is identical for rack or compact devices.

1. Select the required slot on the device (for example,

X308-2M). Remove the dummy cover.

2. Pull out the handle on the selected media module.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 121
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers

3. Place the media module in the guide rails of the device

slot.
The media module is correctly installed when it clips
easily into the device.

4. Push the handle back into the media module. This locks
the media module in the device.

5. Insert the connectors.

Removing a media module

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to the high temperature of the module housing
Before removing an MM900 media module, turn the switch off and allow the device to cool
down first.

1. Remove all connectors from the media module.

2. Pull out the handle of the media module and remove the media module from the device
slot.
3. Secure the dummy cover.

SCALANCE X-300
122 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers

5.3.2 SFP installation in SFP media module

WARNING
Use only approved SFPs
If you use components not approved by Siemens AG, in particular SFPs, Siemens cannot
accept any responsibility for the correct functioning of the Ethernet switch system according
to the specification.
If components are used that have not been Siemens approved, Siemens cannot vouch for
their compatibility or for risk-free use of these components.

You can insert or remove the SFP during ongoing operation.

Inserting an SFP

NOTICE

Only the media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted with approved SFPs. The SFP media
module can be fitted with up to two SFPs.

Device: Variant [Order number] Figure

Media module Labeling on the device
MM992-2SFP 2 x 100/1000 Mbps [6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0]
(SFP media module) 9922AS

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 123
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers

1. Select the required SFP media module in the slot

of the device. (Example: X-308-2M, slot 2)

2. Insert the SFP with the clip closed in the SFP

media module.
Notice: Closing the clip after insertion does not
lock the device in the rack.

3. The SFP can be heard to lock in place and is

therefore firmly secured.

4. Plug the connecting cable into the SFP.

The connecting cable can be heard to lock in
place and is then firmly secured.

Removing an SFP
1. Remove the cable connected to the SFP.
2. Open the clip on the SFP and remove the SFP from the SFP media module.
Notice: It must be possible to remove the SFP easy without using force.
3. Fit a blind plug to the SFP.

SCALANCE X-300
124 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Connecting 6
WARNING

Before connecting up and commissioning the device, read the information in the section
Safety instructions (Page 13)

NOTICE
Commissioning devices with redundancy mechanisms
If you use redundancy mechanisms ("HSR" media redundancy or "MRP" and/or redundant
coupling of rings over standby coupling), open the redundant path before you insert a new
or replacement device in an operational network. A bad configuration or attachment of the
Ethernet cables to incorrectly configured ports causes overload in the network and a
breakdown in communication.
A device may only be inserted in a network and connected in the following situations:
• HSR/MRP:
The ring ports of the device being inserted in the ring were configured as ring ports. The
required redundancy mode must also be enabled (see "Configuration Manual
SCALANCE X-300 / X-400", section "X-300 Ring Configuration"). If the device is
intended to operate as the redundancy manager, "Redundancy manager enabled" must
also be set.
• Standby coupling:
"Standby connection" must be "enabled" and the "Standby connection name" must
match the name of the partner device. You will also need to configure the port with
"Enable Standby Port Monitoring" (see "Configuration Manual SCALANCE X-300 /
X-400", section "X-300/X-400 Standby Mask").

6.1 Connecting the switch

Procedure for connecting the device

Follow the steps below to connect the device:
1. Turn off the power supply.
2. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the following description.
3. Connect the signaling contact of the switch according to the following description.
4. Connect the power supply of the switch according to the following description.
5. Connect the network nodes / subnets to the switch.
6. Turn on the power supply for the switch.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 125
Connecting
6.2 Connecting media modules/SFPs

6.2 Connecting media modules/SFPs

Power supply of the MM900 media modules

The MM900 media modules are supplied with power by the switch.

Power supply of the SFP transceivers

The SFP transceivers are supplied with power via the SFP media module.

6.3 Connecting the grounding

6.3.1 Connecting the functional ground (XR-300M EEC)

Installation on a DIN rail

The device is grounded over the DIN rail.

S7 standard rail
The device is grounded over its rear panel and the neck of the screw.

Wall mounting
The device is grounded by the securing screw in the unpainted hole.
Please note that IE Switches X-300 must be grounded over one securing screw with
minimum resistance.
If an IE Switch X-300 is mounted on a non-conducting base, a grounding cable must be
installed. The grounding cable is not supplied with the device. Connect the paint-free surface
of the IE Switch X-300 to the nearest grounding point using the grounding cable.

19" rack mounting

● 24 VDC variant:
Grounding is via the mounting bracket on the device or alternatively/additionally via the
screw-on bolts on the rear of the device.
● 100 to 240 VAC variant:
Grounding is via the mounting bracket on the device or alternatively/additionally via the
screw-on bolts on the rear of the device.

SCALANCE X-300
126 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.3 Connecting the grounding

6.3.2 Grounding of the X-300EEC

Functional ground
With the devices X-300EEC and XR-300M EEC with a 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
power supply, functional ground must be connected to the grounding bolts or the power
supply terminal of every power supply unit. With the devices X-300EEC and XR-300M EEC
with 24 to 48 VDC, functional ground must be connected to the grounding bolts or the
mounting brackets (XR-300M EEC). On the X-300EEC, the functional ground is on the
bottom of the device, on the XR-300M-EEC on the side.
To wire up the functional ground, use a copper cable of category 18-8 AWG or cable with a
cross-section of 0.75 to 6 mm².

Protective ground
When the device is operated with multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC, the protective ground is connected in addition to the functional ground.

CAUTION
Connecting the protective ground
When operating with the multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC, it
is essential that you connect the main protective conductor via the grounding bolt on the
bottom or side of the device.

To wire up the protective ground, use a copper cable of category 14-8 AWG or cable with a
cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm².

Grounding bolts on the underside of the housing of the X-300EEC or on the rear of the XR-
300M-EEC

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 127
Connecting
6.4 Power supply

6.4 Power supply

6.4.1 24 VDC power supply

6.4.1.1 24 VDC safety extra low voltage

24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)

WARNING
• The IE Switch X-300 is designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage (SELV).
This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with
IEC950/EN60950/ VDE0805 can be connected to the power supply terminals.
• The power supply unit for the IE Switch X-300 power supply must meet NEC Class 2, as
described by the National Electrical Code(r) (ANSI/NFPA 70).
• The power of all connected power supply units must total the equivalent of a power
source with limited power (LPS limited power source).
• If the device is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies),
both power supplies must meet these requirements.
• The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of
100 mA (safety extra-low voltage (SELV), 24 V DC).
• Never operate the device with AC voltage or DC voltage higher than 32 V DC.

CAUTION

If IE Switches X-300 are supplied over long 24 V power supply lines or networks, measures
are necessary to prevent interference by strong electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines.
These can result, for example, due to lightning or switching of large inductive loads.
One of the tests used to attest the immunity of devices of the IE Switches X-300 to
electromagnetic interference was the "surge immunity test" according to EN61000-4-5. This
test requires overvoltage protection for the power supply lines (doe not apply to the
X-300EEC). A suitable device is, for example, the Dehn Blitzductor VT AD 24 V type no.
918 402 or comparable protective element.
Manufacturer: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG, Hans Dehn Str. 1, Postfach 1640, D - 92306
Neumarkt, Germany.

Note
Cable outlet front or rear
There are devices with single (1 x 24 V) or redundant power supply (2 x 24 V). The cable
outlet can be to the front or rear on the device.

SCALANCE X-300
128 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.4 Power supply

Connecting 24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)

● The power supply is connected using a 4-pin plug-in terminal block.
● The power supply can be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no
distribution of load. When a redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with
the higher output voltage supplies the IE Switch X-300 alone.
● The power supply is connected over a high resistance with the enclosure to allow an
ungrounded set up. The two power inputs are non-floating.

Terminal block assignment (4-pin)

Table 6- 1 Pinout of the 24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)

Pin number Assignment Labeling (example)

Pin 1 L1+ 24 V DC
Pin 2 M1
Pin 3 M2
Pin 4 L2+ 24 V DC

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 129
Connecting
6.4 Power supply

6.4.1.2 24 VDC - product group X-300

Table 6- 2 Power supply for a SCALANCE X-300

Type 24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV), redundant

X304-2FE ●
X306-1LD FE ●
X307-3 ●
X307-3LD ●
X308-2 ●
X308-2LD ●
X308-2LH ●
X308-2LH+ ●
X310 ●
X310FE ●
X320-1 FE ●
X320-3LD FE ●

6.4.1.3 12 / 24 VDC - product group X-300M

Table 6- 3 24 V safety extra-low voltage overview

Product Device: (Variant) Safety extra-low voltage (SELV)

group SCALANCE Redundant
X-300M X308-2M (-) 24 VDC
X-300M X308-2M TS (-) 12 VDC

SCALANCE X-300
130 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.4 Power supply

6.4.1.4 24 VDC - product group X-300EEC

Redundancy with the 24...48 V power supply of the IE Switch X-300EEC

The X-300EEC is available with a single or redundant power supply unit to supply 24...48 V
DC. Each power supply unit is monitored for power failure.
The IE Switches X-300EEC therefore provide the following options for redundancy of the
24...48 V DC power supply:
● Redundant power supply with 1 power supply unit
You can connect a redundant power supply to each 24...48 V DC power supply unit.
● Redundant power supply units 24...48 V DC
Connect 1 power supply to each power supply unit.
Since both power supply units have 2 connectors for redundant power supply, you can
connect 2 power supplies to each of the two power supply units. This should, however,
only be necessary in extremely rare situations.

NOTICE
Connection with redundant power supply units 24...48 V DC
If you connect an X-300EEC with redundant power supply units 24...48 V DC to two
power supplies, you will need to connect the power supply to terminal "L1" on both
power supply units.
Only "L1" is monitored on each connector.

6.4.1.5 Connecting a redundant power supply to the X-300EEC

Device variants with 1 or 2 power supply units

There are device variants with one power supply unit and with two power supply units.
Connect the power supply as described below to achieve a correlation between the pin
assignment and LED display.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 131
Connecting
6.4 Power supply

Connecting a redundant power supply to 1 power supply unit

Use the left terminal block to connect the power supply. The terminal block is marked "X1":

L1 L2

L1 M1 M2 L2 F1 F2 L1 M1 M2 L2 F1 F2

Figure 6-1 Anschluss_1_Netzteil_X-300EEC

Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with one
power supply unit
● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1, this is indicated by LED L1.
● If the power supply fails at pins L2/M2, this is indicated by LED L2.

Connecting a redundant power supply to 2 power supply units

To connect the power supplies, use pins L1/M1 of the left terminal block and pins L1/M1 of
the right terminal block. The left terminal block is marked "X1" and the right terminal block
"X2".

L1 L2

L1 M1 M2 L2 F1 F2 L1 M1 M2 L2 F1 F2

Figure 6-2 Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with
two power supply units

● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1 of terminal block "X1", this is indicated by LED L1.
● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1 of terminal block "X2", this is indicated by LED L2.

SCALANCE X-300
132 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.4 Power supply

6.4.1.6 24 V product group XR300M PoE

24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)

WARNING
Safety extra low voltage
The equipment is designed for operation with a directly connected safety extra-low voltage
(SELV). (This does not apply to 100 V to 240 V devices.)
The maximum current via the 24 V terminals is 8 A. You should therefore include a fuse
that trips at a current higher than 8 A. The fuse must meet the following requirements:
• Suitable for DC (min. 60 V / max. 8 A)
• Breaking current at least 10 kA
• UL/CSA listed (UL 248-1 / CSA 22.2 No.
• Classes R, J, L, T or CC
As an alternative, the following requirements:
• Suitable for DC (min. 60 V / max. 8 A)
• Breaking current at least 10 kA
• Approved in compliance with IEC 60127-1 / EN 60127-1
• Breaking characteristics: B or C for a circuit breaker or slow-blow fuse

CAUTION

If IE Switches X-300 are supplied over long 24 V power supply lines or networks, measures
are necessary to prevent interference by strong electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines.
These can result, for example, due to lightning or switching of large inductive loads.
One of the tests used to attest the immunity of devices of the IE Switches X-300 to
electromagnetic interference is the "surge immunity test" according to EN61000-4-5. This
test requires overvoltage protection for the power supply lines. A suitable device is, for
example, the Dehn Blitzductor VT AD 24 V type no. 918 402 or comparable protective
element.
Vendor: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG, Postfach 1640, D-92306 Neumarkt, Germany

Connecting to the power supply (SELV)

● The power supply is connected using a 4-pin plug-in terminal block.
● The power supply can be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no
distribution of load. When a redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with
the higher output voltage supplies the IE Switch X-300 alone.
● The power supply is connected over a high resistance with the enclosure to allow an
ungrounded set up. The two power inputs are non-floating.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 133
Connecting
6.4 Power supply

Terminal block assignment (4-pin)

Table 6- 4 Pinout of the 24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)

Pin number Assignment Labeling (example)

Pin 1 L1+ (24 VDC)
Pin 2 M1
Pin 3 M2
Pin 4 L2+ (24 VDC)

To wire up the power connector, use a copper cable of category 20-12 AWG or cable with a
cross-section of 1.0 to 2.5 mm².

6.4.2 100 to 240 VAC power supply

WARNING
Danger from line voltage
Devices with this mark have a 100 to 240 VAC power supply.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and
installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Connecting and disconnecting may only be performed by an electrical specialist.
Connect or disconnect power supply cables only when the power is turned off.

WARNING
Devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply do not have an ATEX approval.
Devices with a 100 to 240 V AC power supply are not approved for use in hazardous areas
according to EC-RL-94/9 (ATEX).

SCALANCE X-300
134 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.4 Power supply

CAUTION
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting
cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where
necessary, with cable ties.

CAUTION
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting
cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where
necessary, with cable ties.

6.4.2.1 Fitting the connector for 100 to 240 V AC

WARNING
Use only two-wire cables
The connector can only fitted correctly to two-wire cables. If used with cables with more
than two cores, correct functioning of the connector casing cannot be guaranteed.
In this case, human life may be endangered by the line voltage because the two halves of
the casing can separate!

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 135
Connecting
6.4 Power supply

Procedure

N
L1




Follow the steps below to fit the connector to a two-wire cable:

1. Connect the cable to the terminal block. Strip the cable jacket only as far as necessary to
be able to strip the insulation and connect up the wires.
2. Feed the supplied cable tie through the two openings in the lower part of the housing as
shown in the figure.
3. Insert the terminal block with the connected cable in the lower part of the housing and
tighten the cable tie. The cable must be securely held in the lower part of the housing by
the cable tie. Cut off the excess cable tie.
4. Fit the upper part of the housing. The housing is correctly mounted when the two catches
audibly click into place and are flush with the surface of the housing.

SCALANCE X-300
136 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.4 Power supply

6.4.2.2 Connecting the 100 to 240 VAC power supply

Connecting the 100 to 240 VAC power supply via the 2-pin terminal block
There are devices with single (1 x 100 to 240 V) or redundant power supply (2 x 100 to 240
V). The cable outlet can be to the front or rear depending on the device type.
● The power supply is connected using a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.
● The two power inputs are always non-floating.

Terminal block assignment (2-pin)

Table 6- 5 Pin assignment of the 100 to 240 VAC power supply

Pin number Assignment Labeling

Pin 1 L1 (100 to 240 VAC)

Pin 2 N

6.4.2.3 Connecting the power supply 100 to 240 VAC to X-300EEC / XR-300M EEC

Power supply 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC

The switch is available in the following versions for power supply with the multirange power
supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
● With a single power supply unit (XR324-4M EEC, 1 x 230 VAC)
● With redundant power supply units (XR324-4M EEC, 2 x 230 VAC)
Each power supply unit PS1 and PS2 has a separate supply connector.
You can recognize the type of power supply from the labeling on the device and the labeling
of the terminal block for the power supply of the switch.
On devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply, the connectors of the signaling contact and
the power supply are identical. To avoid confusion, the two pins have a different coding.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 137
Connecting
6.4 Power supply

Grounding

WARNING
PE connection with X-300EEC and XR-300EEC
Grounding simply via the housing is inadequate. For safe operation, the protective ground
must be connected to the grounding bolts.
On the SCALANCE X-300EEC, the PE connector is on the bottom of the device. On the
SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the PE connector is on the rear of the device between the
power connectors.

Connecting to the power supply

The connection is made via one (or two) 3-pin connector(s) on the terminal block for the
power supply.

Table 6- 6 Pin assignment at terminal block 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC for the power supply

Pin number Assignment

Pin 1 L (100 to 240 V)
Pin 2 N
Pin 3 FE (functional earth)

To wire up the power connector, use a copper cable of category 18-8 AWG or cable with a
cross-section of 0.75 to 6 mm².
DC voltage is connected at the following terminals:
● Plus to "L"
● M to "N"
Secure the firm seat of connectors and the terminal block by tightening the screws (does not
apply to X-300EEC).

SCALANCE X-300
138 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.4 Power supply

6.4.2.4 Connecting the 100 to 240 V AC power supply with the XR-300M PoE

Connecting to the power supply

The devices have a single power supply (1 x 100 to 240 V).
The power supply is connected using a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.

Terminal block assignment (2-pin)

Table 6- 7 Pin assignment of the 100 to 240 VAC power supply

Assignment Labeling

To wire up the power connector, use a copper cable of category 18-12 AWG or cable with a
cross-section of 0.75 to 2.5 mm².

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 139
Connecting
6.5 Signaling contact

6.5 Signaling contact

6.5.1 24 VDC signaling contact

The signaling contact is connected to a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of 100 mA (safety extra low
voltage SELV 12 VDC / 24 VDC).

Table 6- 8 Pin assignment of the signaling contact

Pin number Assignment (example)

Pin 1 F1
Pin 2 F2

To wire up the signaling contact, use a copper cable of category 18-12 AWG or cable with a
cross-section of 0.75 to 2.5 mm².

CAUTION
Laying the connecting cables of the signaling contact with the X-300EEC
To improve the EMC properties (surge protection), the two connecting cables of the
signaling contact should be laid together.

6.5.2 Signaling contact 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC (X-300EEC)

WARNING
Danger from line voltage
Devices with this mark have a 100 to 240 VAC power supply.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and
installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Connecting and disconnecting may only be performed by an electrical specialist.
Connect or disconnect power supply cables only when the power is turned off.

SCALANCE X-300
140 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Connecting
6.5 Signaling contact

Signaling contact 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC

The signaling contact is connected to a 3-pin plug-in terminal block.

Table 6- 9 Pin assignment of the 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC signaling contact

Pin number Assignment

F1 F2 F3

F1 NC contact
F2 Root
F3 NO contact

To wire up the signaling contact, use a copper cable of category 18-8 AWG or cable with a
cross-section of 0.75 to 6 mm².

CAUTION
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting
cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where
necessary, with cable ties.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 141
Connecting
6.5 Signaling contact

SCALANCE X-300
142 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Configuration, displays and display elements 7
7.1 Assignment of slot numbers

CAUTION
Specifying the slot number
Slots should be numbered in ascending order.
Insert a label with the slot number in the slot on the housing starting, for example, with the
fixed ports and continuing with the modular ports (with MM900 media modules fitted).
Include blind covers and unused slots in the numbering.

Applying the slot numbers

1. Place the required slot number in front of the module.
2. Place the tongue in the opening on the module.
3. Press the slot number into the recess on the front of the housing with your finger. The slot
number breaks out of the wheel.

Figure 7-1 Slot number plate

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 143
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.2 Show Location

7.2 Show Location

Localizing an IE Switches X-300

To identify an IE Switch X-300 locally and with certainty, you can use the "show location"
function on a programming device to select the node over the network and make it flash.
This can be used, for example, when assigning addresses to make sure that the correct
node receives the address. All port LEDs of the addressed node flash green at 2 Hz.
With the PST Tool V3.0 or higher, you can trigger this function with "Module \ Flash".

7.3 XR-300 diagnostics port

RJ-11 jack on the rear of the device

The diagnostics port of a SCALANCE XR-300M is located on the rear of the device and is an
RJ-11 jack. Connect this port to the serial interface (RS-232) of a PC. A connecting cable
with suitable connectors ships with the XR-300M.

Figure 7-2 Diagnostics port

SCALANCE X-300
144 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Configuration, displays and display elements
7.3 XR-300 diagnostics port

Pinout of the RJ-11 jack of the diagnostics port

Figure 7-3 RJ-11 jack (schematic)

Pin number Pinout of the RJ-11 jack

1 n.c.
2 n.c.
3 TD (Transmit Data)
4 SG (Signal Ground)
5 RD (Receive Data)
6 n.c.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 145
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.4 The SET / SELECT button

Pinout of the XR-300 (connecting cable for the diagnostics port)

A connecting cable for the diagnostics port has a 9-pin D-sub female connector for the PC
and an RJ-11 plug at the other end. The following table shows the pinout.

RJ-11 plug D-sub (9-pin, female)

Pin number Assignment Pin number Assignment
1 n.c. 1 n.c.
2 n.c. 2 RD (Receive Data)
3 TD (Transmit Data) 3 TD (Transmit Data)
4 SG (Signal Ground) 4 n.c.
5 RD (Receive Data) 5 SG (Signal Ground)
6 n.c. 6 n.c.
7 n.c.
8 n.c.
9 n.c.

7.4 The SET / SELECT button

The SET/SELECT button is located on the top of the housing of devices of the X-300 EEC
series. On all other devices, this button is on the front panel of the housing beside the LED
display. The SET/SELECT button has several functions that are described below.

Change the display mode

By pressing the button briefly, you change to the display mode of the LED display. For more
detailed information on this topic, refer to the section "LED display".

Resetting the device to the factory defaults

If you reset, all the changes you have made will be overwritten by factory defaults. Follow the
steps outlined below:
1. Turn on display mode A. Display mode A is active when the "DM" LED is not lit. If this
LED is lit or flashing, you will need to press the SET/SELECT briefly (possibly several
times) until the "DM" LED goes off. If the SELECT/SET button is not pressed for longer
than a minute, the device also turns on display mode A.
2. Hold down the SELECT/SET button for 12 seconds. If you release the button before the
12 seconds have elapsed, the reset is canceled.

SCALANCE X-300
146 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display

Definition of the fault mask

Using the fault mask, you specify an individual "good status" for the connected ports and the
power supply. Deviations from this status are then displayed as errors/faults.
1. Turn on display mode A or D. Display mode A is active when the "DM" LED is not lit.
Display mode D is active when the "DM" LED flashes yellow/orange. If a different display
mode is active, you will need to press the SET/SELECT briefly (possibly several times)
until the required display mode is active.
2. Hold down the SET/SELECT button for five seconds. After three seconds, the "DM" LED
begins to flash. If you release the button before the five seconds have elapsed, the
previous fault mask will be retained.

Enable/disable the redundancy manager

1. Turn on display mode B. Display mode B is active when the "DM" LED is lit green. If a
different display mode is active, you will need to press the SET/SELECT briefly (possibly
several times) until display mode B is active.
2. Hold down the SET/SELECT button for five seconds. After three seconds, the "DM" LED
begins to flash. If you release the button before the five seconds have elapsed, the action
is aborted.
3. The result of the action depends on the initial situation:
– If the redundancy manager and media redundancy were disabled, media redundancy
is also enabled after enabling the redundancy manager.
– If you disable the redundancy manager, media redundancy remains enabled.

7.5 LED display

The "RM" LED for the "redundancy manager" function

The "RM" LED indicates whether or not the device is operating in the role of redundancy
manager and whether or not the ring is working free of error.

LED color LED status Meaning

- off The device is not operating in the role of "redundancy manager".
green on The device is operating in the role of redundancy manager. The
ring is working without problems, monitoring is activated.
green flashes The device is operating in the role of redundancy manager. An
interruption has been detected on the ring and the device has
switched through.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 147
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display

The "SB" LED for the standby function

This LED shows the status of the standby function.

LED color LED status Meaning

- off The standby function is disabled.
green on The standby function is enabled. The standby section is passive.
green flashes The standby function is enabled. The standby section is active.

The "F" LED for the fault status

The "F" LED (fault) provides information on the error status of the device. While the device is
starting up, this LED has the following meaning:

LED color LED status Meaning during the device startup

- off Device startup successful.
red on Device startup not yet completed or a fault/error has occurred.
red flashes Bad firmware image.

During normal operation, the "F" LED provides the following information:

LED color LED status Meaning during operation

- off No operating problems
red on The device has detected an error. The signaling contact opens.

The "DM" LED for the display mode

The "DM" LED (Display Mode) indicates which of the four display modes A, B, C or D is
currently active. The meaning of the L1, L2 and P1, P2, ... LEDs depends on the display
mode.

LED color LED status Meaning

- off Display mode A
green on Display mode B
orange on Display mode C
yellow/orange flashes Display mode D

SCALANCE X-300
148 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display

Selecting the display mode

Press the SELECT/SET button to set the required display mode. If the SELECT/SET button
is not pressed for longer than a minute, the device automatically changes to display mode A.

Pressing SELECT/SET button Status of the "DM" LED Display mode

starting at display mode A
- off Display mode A (default mode)
Press once lit green Display mode B
Press twice lit orange Display mode C
Press three times flashes yellow/orange Display mode D

The "L1" and "L2" or "L" LEDs for the power supply
Whereas on other devices, the "L1" and "L2" LEDs indicate information about the power, on
the SCALANCE X306-1LD FE, this is done by the "L" LED. A redundant power supply for
this device can be recognized by the color of the LED.
Meaning in display mode A, B or C

LED Color Status Meaning

L1 / L2 _ off Power supply L1 / L2 lower than 17 V *)
green on Power supply L1 / L2 higher than 17 V *)
L - off Power supplies L1 and L2 less than 17 V or not connected.
orange on Power supply L1 or L2 higher than 17 V
(no redundant supply).
green on Power supplies L1 and L2 higher than 17 V
(redundant supply).
*)) The following applies to the X-300EEC:
• For devices with power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC: Limit voltage = 17 VDC
• For devices with a multiple range power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
Limit voltage = 46.5 VDC or 80 VAC

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 149
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display

Meaning in display mode D

LED Color Status Meaning

L1 / L2 _ off Power supply L1 / L2 is not monitored. If L1 / L2 falls below 17 V *), the
signaling contact does not respond.
green on Power supply L1 / L2 is monitored. If L1 / L2 falls below 17 V *), the
signaling contact responds.
L - off Power supplies L1 and L2 are not monitored. If L1 or L2 falls below 17
V, the signaling contact does not respond.
orange on Power supply L1 or L2 is monitored. If L1 or L2 falls below 17 V, the
signaling contact responds.
green on Power supplies L1 and L2 are monitored. If L1 and L2 fall below 17 V,
the signaling contact responds.
*)) The following applies to the X-300EEC:
• For devices with power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC: Limit voltage = 17 VDC
• For devices with a multiple range power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
Limit voltage = 46.5 VDC or 80 VAC

Note
Devices of the X-300EEC product group
When using only one power supply unit 24 VDC and two 24 VDC power supplies, the LEDs
"L1" and "L2" signal the existence of the power supply L1 and L2.
When using two 24 VDC power supply units, the LEDs "L1" and "L2" signal the existence of
the primary voltage and the secondary voltage for both power supply units. If the power
supply is intact, a fault occurring on a power supply unit on the secondary side can be
recognized.

SCALANCE X-300
150 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display

The P1, P2, ... LEDs for the port status

The P1, P2, ... LEDs show information on the status of their respective ports (transmission
rate, mode, port monitoring). The meaning of these LEDs depends on the display mode
("DM" LED).
Meaning in display mode A

LED color LED status Meaning

- off No valid link to the port (for example station turned off or cable
not connected).
green on Link exists and port in normal status. In this status, the port can
receive and send data.
flashes once per Link exists and port in "blocking" status. In this status, the port
period only receives management data (no user data).
flashes three times per Link exists and port turned off by management. In this status,
period no data is sent or received over the port.
flashes four times per Port exists and is in the "monitor port" status. In this status, the
period data traffic of another port is mirrored to this port.
yellow flashes / lit Receiving data at port.
With SCALANCE X-300 devices, both the receipt and the
sending of data is indicated for the optical gigabit ports.

Meaning in display mode B

LED color LED status Meaning

- off Port operating at 10 Mbps.
green on Port operating at 100 Mbps.
orange on Port operating at 1000 Mbps.

If there is a link fault and the type of transmission is fixed (autonegotiation off), the desired
status, in other words the set transmission rate (1000 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 10 Mbps) continues
to be displayed. If there is a link fault and autonegotiation is active, the port LED goes off.
Meaning in display mode C

LED color LED status Meaning

- off Port operating in half duplex.
green on Port operating in full duplex.

Meaning in display mode D

LED color LED status Meaning

- off The port is not monitored; in other words, if a link is not established at
the port, this does not trigger the signaling contact.
green on The port is monitored, in other words, if no connection was established
at the port (for example no cable inserted), this triggers the signaling
contact and an error state results.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 151
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display

SCALANCE X-300
152 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Technical specifications 8
8.1 Overview of operating temperatures for SCALANCE X-300

Operating temperature depending on the media modules used

The information applies to media modules with product version 2 (PV2):

Type Installation Without media MM992-2CUC MM991-2LH+ (SC) Media module Media module
location module MM992-2CU MM992-2LH MM992-2SFP MM992-2SFP
MM991-2 MM992-2LH+ with SFP with SFP
MM991-2LD MM992-2ELH transceiver transceiver
MM991-2 (SC) SFP991-1 SFP991-1LH+
MM991-2LD (SC) SFP991-1LD SFP992-1LH
MM992-2 SFP992-1 SFP992-1LH+
MM992-2LD SFP992-1LD SFP992-1ELH
X-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +60 °C
Vertical -40 °C to +50 °C
X-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
PoE Vertical -40 °C to +45 °C
XR-300M Horizontal Not possible -40 °C to +70 °C Maximum 2 -40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2
(fully modular modules in slots 11 modules in slots
device) and 12: 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 With more than 2
modules or other modules or other
slot assignment: slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical Not possible -40 °C to +50 °C
(fully modular
device)
XR-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2 -40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2
PoE modules in slots 11 modules in slots
and 12: 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 With more than 2
modules or other modules or other
slot assignment: slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical -40 °C to +50 °C

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 153
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Type Installation Without media MM992-2CUC MM991-2LH+ (SC) Media module Media module
location module MM992-2CU MM992-2LH MM992-2SFP MM992-2SFP
MM991-2 MM992-2LH+ with SFP with SFP
MM991-2LD MM992-2ELH transceiver transceiver
MM991-2 (SC) SFP991-1 SFP991-1LH+
MM991-2LD (SC) SFP991-1LD SFP992-1LH
MM992-2 SFP992-1 SFP992-1LH+
MM992-2LD SFP992-1LD SFP992-1ELH
XR-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +70 °C Maximum 2 -40 °C to +70 °C Maximum 2
EEC modules in slots 11 SFP transceivers modules in slots
and 12: of this group can 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C only be used in -40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 conjunction with With more than 2
modules or other media modules modules or other
slot assignment: MM992-2CUC slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C and -40 °C to +50 °C
MM992-2CU.
When using
other modules:
-40 °C to +60 °C
Vertical -40 °C to +50 °C

The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed.
The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical
installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.

8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific
device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the
product group.

SCALANCE X-300
154 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

8.2.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 1 Construction

Device variant Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Degree of

protection
X304-2FE, 60 × 125 × 123 mm 700 g IP30
X306-1LD FE
X307-3, 120 × 125 × 123 mm 1 400 g IP30
X307-3LD,
X308-2,
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE,
X320-1FE, 180 × 125 × 123 mm 1 650 g IP30
X320-3LD FE

Table 8- 2 Installation options

Device variant Installation options

X304-2FE, • DIN rail
X306-1LD FE
• S7-300 standard rail
• Wall
X307-3, • DIN rail 1)
X307-3LD,
• S7-300 standard rail
X308-2,
X308-2LD, • Wall
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE,
X320-1FE,
X320-3LD FE
1) Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35
mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 155
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Table 8- 3 Permitted ambient conditions

Device variant Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature humidity in temperature at operating
operation at 25 °C altitude
X304-2FE, -40 °C to +70 °C As of hardware product < 95 % (no Max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
X306-1LD FE, version 1: condensation) Max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
X320-1FE, -40 °C to +60 °C
X320-3LD FE
X307-3, -40 °C to +70 °C For hardware product < 95 % (no Max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
X308-2 version 1: condensation) Max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
0 °C to +60 °C
As of hardware product
version 2:
-10 °C to +60 °C
X307-3LD, -40 °C to +70 °C For hardware product < 95 % (no Max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
X308-2LD, version 1: condensation) Max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
X308-2LH, 0 °C to +60 °C
X308-2LH+, As of hardware product
X310, version 2:
X310FE -40 °C to +60 °C

8.2.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 4 Connection for end devices or network components

Device variant Electrical Optical

over twisted pair over fiber-optic cable
X304-2FE 4 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 2 x SC duplex socket (MM)
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
X306-1LD FE 6 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 1 x SC duplex socket (SM)
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
X307-3 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 3 x SC duplex sockets
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseSX)
X307-3LD 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 3 x SC duplex sockets
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseLX)
X308-2 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 2 x SC duplex sockets
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1 x RJ-45 socket with MDI-X pinning 1000BaseSX)
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/ full duplex)
X308-2LD 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 2 x SC duplex sockets
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 1000BaseLX)
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)

SCALANCE X-300
156 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Device variant Electrical Optical

over twisted pair over fiber-optic cable
X308-2LH 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 2 x SC duplex sockets
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1 x RJ-45 socket with MDI-X pinning 1000BaseLX)
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/ full duplex)
X308-2LH+ 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 2 x SC duplex sockets
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 1000BaseLX)
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
X310 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment -
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
3 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
X310FE 10 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment -
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
X320-1 FE 20 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 1 x SC duplex socket (MM)
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) (100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
X320-3LD FE 20 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 1 x SC duplex socket (MM)
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex) 2 x SC duplex sockets (SM)
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)

Table 8- 5 Electrical data

Device variant Supply voltage Power loss Current consumption Overcurrent protection
Safety extra-low voltage at 24 VDC at rated voltage at input (non-
(SELV) 24 VDC replaceable fuse)
X304-2FE 24 VDC 6.2 W 260 mA 3 A / 32 V
(18 to 32 VDC)
X306-1LD FE 12 VDC 4.8 W 200 mA 3 A / 32 V
(18 to 32 VDC)
X307-3, 12 VDC 9.6 W 400 mA 3 A / 32 V
X307-3LD, (18 to 32 VDC)
X308-2,
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE,
X320-1 FE
X320-3LD FE 12 VDC 12 W 500 mA 3 A / 32 V
(18 to 32 VDC)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 157
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Table 8- 6 Electrical data: Signaling contact

Voltage via signaling contact 24 VDC

Switching capacity (resistive load) max. 100 mA

Table 8- 7 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact

Power supply 1 x 4-pin

Signaling contact 1 x 2-pin

Table 8- 8 Electrical data: Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input

Device variant Transmitter output (optical) Receiver input

min. [dBm] max. [dBm] Sensitivity min. [dBm] Input power max.
[dBm]
X304-2FE -19 -14 -32 -3
X306-1LD FE -15 -8 -34 -3
X307-3 -9,5 -4 -17 -3
X307-3LD -9,5 -3 -21 -3
X308-2 -9,5 -4 -17 -3
X308-2LD -9,5 -3 -21 -3
X308-2LH -6 0 -23 -3
X308-2LH+ 0 5 -23 -3
X310 - - - -
X310FE - - - -
X320-1 FE -19 -14 -32 -3
X320-3LD FE -151) -81) -341) -31)
-192) -142) -322) -32)
1) Fast Ethernet, long distance interface
2) Fast Ethernet, multimode interface

Note
Exception in the naming of X320-3LD FE
With the X320-3LD FE IE switch, the key to the name is different. The position -3LD covers a
total of 3 connectors (1-2) of which only 2 connectors are LD, refer to the explanation below:
• Port 21: Multimode
• Port 22: LD (long distance, single mode)
• Port 23: LD (long distance, single mode)

SCALANCE X-300
158 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Note
2 optical interface transceivers possible (X320-3LD FE)
The device is also equipped with 2 optical interface transceivers.
• 1) Fast Ethernet, long distance interface
• 2) Fast Ethernet, multimode interface
As a result, the electrical data in the technical specifications is divided into two parts:
transmitter output optical and receiver input.

8.2.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 9 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 75 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m

Table 8- 10 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 24 with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 0 to 90 m
AWG 4x2
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 24
AWG
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 60 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 159
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Table 8- 11 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet)

Device variant Fiber-optic cable Permitted cable length Attenuation

type
X304-2FE, 50/125 µm 0 to 5 km ≤1 dB/km at 1 310 nm; 1 200 MHz×km; maximum
X320-1 FE multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable
attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
62.5/125 µm 0 ... 5 km ≤3.1 dB/km at 850 nm; 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
X306-1LD FE 9/125 µm 0 to 26 km ≤0.5 dB/km at 1 310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5
single mode fiber dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2
dB link power margin
X310FE - - -
X320-3LD FE 50/125 µm 0 to 5 km ≤1 dB/km at 1 310 nm; 1 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable
attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
9/125 µm 0 to 26 km ≤0.5 dB/km at 1 310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5
single mode fiber dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2
dB link power margin

Table 8- 12 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - gigabit)

Device variant Fiber-optic cable Permitted cable length Attenuation

type
X307-3, 62.5/125 µm 0 to 350 m ≤3.1 dB/km at 850 nm; 200 MHz×km; maximum
X308-2 multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
50/125 µm 0 to 750 m ≤2.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
X307-3LD 9/125 µm 0 to 10 km ≤0.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 310 MHz×km; maximum
X308-2LD single mode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 6 dB max. permitted FO cable
attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
X308-2LH 9/125 µm 1) ... 40 km ≤0.4 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 550 MHz×km; maximum
single mode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 18 dB max. permitted FO cable
attenuation at 2 dB link power margin
X308-2LH+ 9/125 µm 2) ... 70 km ≤0.28 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 550 MHz×km; maximum
single mode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 21 dB max. permitted FO cable
attenuation at 2 dB link power margin
X310 - - -
1) Minimum cable attenuation 3 dB
2) Minimum cable attenuation 8 dB

SCALANCE X-300
160 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

8.2.4 Other properties

Table 8- 13 Switching properties

Max. number of learnable addresses 8 000

Aging time 30 sec
Switching technique Store and forward
Latency 5 μs

Table 8- 14 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms

Redundancy mechanism Reconfiguration times

HSR 300 ms
Standby link 300 ms
MRP 200 ms

Table 8- 15 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

Device variant MTBF 1)

X304-2FE 55 years
X306-1LD FE 65 years
X307-3 40 years
X308-2 42 years
X307-3LD , 38 years
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310, 45 years
X310FE
X320-1 FE 35 years
X320-3LD FE 30 years
1) These values apply at 40 °C.

Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all
ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 161
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications

Table 8- 16 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames per second At a frame length of

At 100 Mbps At 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64 bytes
84459 844595 128 bytes
45290 452899 256 bytes
23496 234962 512 bytes
11973 119732 1024 bytes
9615 96154 1280 bytes
8127 81274 1518 bytes

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When
a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.

SCALANCE X-300
162 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications

8.3 X-300M technical specifications

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific
device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the
product group.

8.3.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 17 Construction

Dimensions (W x H x D) 120 × 125 × 124 mm

Weight 1 400 g
Degree of protection IP20

Table 8- 18 Installation options

Installation options • DIN rail 1)

• S7-300 standard rail
• Wall

1) Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35
mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 163
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications

Table 8- 19 Permitted ambient conditions

Media module Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative humidity Max. ambient
temperature 1) in operation at 25 °C temperature at operating
altitude
Without media module -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
-40 °C to +70 °C condensation) max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
Vertical installation: max. 60 °C as of 3 000 m
-40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM991-2, -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM991-2 (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C condensation) max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
MM991-2LD, Vertical installation: max. 60 °C as of 3 000 m
MM991-2LD (SC), -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
MM992-2, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
MM992-2LD, max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2CU,
MM992-2CUC
MM991-2LH+ (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM992-2LH, -40 °C to +70 °C condensation) max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
MM992-2LH+, Vertical installation: max. 60 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2ELH -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP -40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1. -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
SFP991-1LD, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1. max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP992-1LD
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP -40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1LH+, -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
SFP992-1LH, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1LH+, max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP992-1ELH
SFP991-1ELH200
1) The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if
the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.

SCALANCE X-300
164 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications

8.3.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 20 Connection for end devices or network components

Max. number 8 ports

Electrical (via twisted-pair) 4 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
Media module slots 4 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.

Table 8- 21 Electrical data: Power supply

Device version Redundant Redundant power Power supply

(power supply) power supply supply possible
unit
12 VDC No Yes 12 VDC
(10.6 to 32 VDC)
24 VDC No Yes 12 VDC
(18 to 32 VDC)

Table 8- 22 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss

Device version Current consumption Effective power loss

(power supply)
12 VDC 1.4 A 16.6 W
24 VDC 0.7 A 16.6 W

Table 8- 23 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection

Device version Overcurrent protection of the power supply

(power supply) Non-replaceable fuse
12 VDC 3 A / 32 V
24 VDC 3 A / 32 V

Table 8- 24 Electrical data: Signaling contact

Device version Voltage via signaling contact Switching capacity (resistive

(power supply) load)
12 VDC 12 VDC / 24 VDC Max. 100 mA
24 VDC 24 VDC Max. 100 mA

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 165
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications

Table 8- 25 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact

Device version Power supply Signaling contact

(power supply)
12 VDC 1 x 4-pin 1 x 2-pin
24 VDC 1 x 4-pin 1 x 2-pin

8.3.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 26 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 75 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m

Table 8- 27 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24 with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 0 to 90 m
AWG 4×2
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 60 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord

Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP
transceivers.

SCALANCE X-300
166 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications

8.3.4 Other properties

Table 8- 28 Switching properties

Max. number of learnable addresses 8 000

Aging time 30 sec
Switching technique Store and forward
Latency 5 μs

Table 8- 29 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms

Redundancy mechanism Reconfiguration times

HSR 300 ms
Standby link 300 ms
MRP 200 ms

Table 8- 30 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

MTBF > 40 years 1)

1) The time information applies to the mounting device without media modules.

Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all
ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 167
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications

Table 8- 31 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames per second At a frame length of

At 100 Mbps At 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64 bytes
84459 844595 128 bytes
45290 452899 256 bytes
23496 234962 512 bytes
11973 119732 1024 bytes
9615 96154 1280 bytes
8127 81274 1518 bytes

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When
a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.

SCALANCE X-300
168 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications

8.4 XR-300M technical specifications

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific
device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the
product group.

8.4.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 32 Construction

Device version Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Degree of

(power supply) protection
2 x 24 VDC 483 × 44 × 305 mm 5 500 g IP20
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 483 × 44 × 305 mm 5 900 g IP20

Table 8- 33 Installation options

Device version Installation options

(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC • 19" rack 1)
• Desktop operation with adhesive feet
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 19" rack 1)
1) Note: If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more
detailed information in the section "Mechanical load in operation".

Note
No desktop operation for devices with 100 to 240 VAC power supply
Desktop operation is permitted only for the 24 VDC variants of the rack devices (R). The
adhesive feet ship with the 24 VDC variants. In this case, the permitted ambient temperature
is -40 °C to +50 °C.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 169
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications

Table 8- 34 Permitted environmental conditions depending on the media modules used

Media module 1) Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature 2) humidity in temperature at operating
operation at 25 °C altitude
MM991-2, -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM991-2 (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C condensation) max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
MM991-2LD, Vertical installation: max. 60 °C as of 3 000 m
MM991-2LD (SC), -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
MM992-2, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
MM992-2LD, max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2CU,
MM992-2CUC
MM991-2LH+ (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM992-2LH, Max. 2 modules in condensation) max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
MM992-2LH+, slots 11 and 12: max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2ELH -40 °C to +60 °C Vertical installation:
With more than 2 max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
modules or other slot max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical installation:
-40 °C to +50 °C
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP -40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1. -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
SFP991-1LD, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1. max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP992-1LD
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP Max. 2 modules in condensation) max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: slots 11 and 12: max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1LH+, -40 °C to +60 °C Vertical installation:
SFP992-1LH, With more than 2 max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1LH+, modules or other slot max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP992-1ELH assignment:
SFP991-1ELH200 -40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical installation:
-40 °C to +50 °C
1) Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the
WBM or the CLI.
2) The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if
the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.

SCALANCE X-300
170 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications

8.4.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 35 Connection for end devices or network components

Max. number 24 ports

Media module slots 12 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
Diagnostics port RJ-11 jack

Table 8- 36 Electrical data: Power supply

Device version Redundant Redundant power Power supply

(power supply) power supply supply possible
unit
2 x 24 VDC No Yes 12 VDC
(19.2 to 28.8 VDC)
1 x 100 to 240 VAC No No 100 to 240 VAC
(85 to 264 VAC)

Table 8- 37 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss

Device version Current consumption Effective power loss

(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC 1.8 A 44 W
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 0.8 to 0.45 A 50 W

Table 8- 38 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection

Device version Overcurrent protection of the power supply

(power supply) Non-replaceable fuse
2 x 24 VDC 5 A / 125 V
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 3.15 A / 250 V

Table 8- 39 Electrical data: Signaling contact

Voltage via signaling contact 24 VDC

Switching capacity (resistive load) max. 100 mA

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 171
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications

Table 8- 40 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact

Device version Power supply Signaling contact

(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC 2 x 4-pin 2 x 2-pin
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 1 x 2-pin 1 x 2-pin

8.4.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 41 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 75 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m

Table 8- 42 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24 with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 0 to 90 m
AWG 4×2
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 60 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord

Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP
transceivers.

SCALANCE X-300
172 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications

8.4.4 Block architecture

Block architecture with SCALANCE XR-300 devices

The XR324-12M and XR324-4M handle the Ethernet frame traffic of the 24 ports with the aid
of three switch blocks.
● The three switch blocks are connected in series (block 1 via block 2 to block 3)
● Gigabit wire speed is possible within a block (max. 8 ports per block).
● Between the blocks there is a bandwidth of 1 gigabit/s available,that must be shared by
all ports for frame traffic between the blocks.
When operating solely with Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), the XR devices support full wire
speed via all blocks.

1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

7 8 9 10 11 12

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s

Figure 8-1 Block architecture of the XR324-12M

1 2 3
1 2

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P1 P2 P1 P2

3 4

P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P1 P2 P1 P2

1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s

Figure 8-2 Block architecture of the XR324-4M

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 173
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications

8.4.5 Other properties

Table 8- 43 Switching properties

Max. number of learnable addresses 8 000

Aging time 30 sec
Switching technique Store and forward
Latency 5 μs

Table 8- 44 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms

Redundancy mechanism Reconfiguration times

HSR 300 ms
Standby link 300 ms
MRP 200 ms

Table 8- 45 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

Device version (power supply) MTBF 1)

2 x 24 VDC > 26 years
1 x 100 to 240 VAC > 22 years
1) These times apply to the mounting device without media modules.

Table 8- 46 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames per second At a frame length of

At 100 Mbps At 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64 bytes
84459 844595 128 bytes
45290 452899 256 bytes
23496 234962 512 bytes
11973 119732 1024 bytes
9615 96154 1280 bytes
8127 81274 1518 bytes

SCALANCE X-300
174 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When
a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.

8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific
device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the
product group.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 175
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

8.5.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 47 Construction

Device version Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Degree of

(power supply) protection
1 24 VDC power supply unit • Without clip: 1 800 g IP30
60 × 125 × 123 mm
• With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm
2 x 24 VDC power supply • Without clip: 2 030 g IP30
units 60 × 125 × 123 mm
• With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm
1 x power supply unit • Without clip: 1 850 g IP30
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 60 × 125 × 123 mm
VDC
• With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm
2 x power supply units • Without clip: 2 120 g IP30
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 60 × 125 × 123 mm
VDC
• With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm

Table 8- 48 Installation options

Installation options • DIN rail

• S7-300 standard rail 1)
• Wall 2)
• 19" rack 3)

1) Possible only with adapter (must be provided by installers).

2) Wall mounting possible with suitable wall support.
3) With mounting support

Table 8- 49 Permitted ambient conditions

Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient temperature

temperature humidity in at operating altitude
operation at 25 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +70 °C 1) < 95 % (no Max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
condensation) Max. 60 °C as of 3 000 m
1) The IE Switch was type tested for 16 h at +85 °C.

SCALANCE X-300
176 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

Table 8- 50 Mechanical stability

Strain withstood / category Test conditions

(standard)
Vibration Frequency range 10 Hz to 150 Hz:
(IEC 60068-2-6)
• Transit frequency: 58 Hz to 60 Hz
• Peak value of the displacement [mm] below the transit
frequency: 0.075
• Peak value of the acceleration [g] above the transit
frequency: 1
• Number of cycles per axis: 20
Frequency range 5 Hz to 150 Hz:
• Transit frequency: 8.4 Hz
• Peak value of the displacement [mm] below the transit
frequency: 3.5
• Peak value of the acceleration [g] above the transit
frequency: 1
• Number of cycles per axis: 10
• Octaves / min: 1
Frequency range 2 Hz to 100 Hz:
• Frequency range: 2 Hz to 100 Hz
• Transit frequency: 13.2 Hz
• Peak value of the displacement [mm] below the transit
frequency:1
• Peak value of the acceleration [g] above the transit
frequency: 0.7
• Number of cycles per
Vibration • Velocity: <10 mm/s
(IEEE1613 Class V.S.2)
• Frequency: 1 to 150 Hz
Shock • Acceleration: 15 g
(IEC 60068-2-27)
• Duration of the pulse: 11 ms
• Number of shocks per direction: 3

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 177
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

8.5.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 51 Connection for end devices or network components

Device variant Electrical Optical

over twisted pair over fiber-optic cable
X302-7EEC 2 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 7 x LC sockets multimode
(all variants) 10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex) (100 Mbps, full duplex)
X307-2EEC 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 2 x LC sockets multimode
(all variants) (100 Mbps, full duplex)
• 5 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
(half/full duplex)
• 2 x Gigabit Ethernet
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/full duplex)

Table 8- 52 Electrical data: Power supply

Device version Redundant Redundant power Power supply

(power supply) power supply supply possible (min./max. range)
unit
1 power supply unit No Yes 24 to 48 VDC
24 to 48 VDC (19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
2 power supply units Yes Yes 1) 24 to 48 VDC
24 to 48 VDC (19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
1 x power supply unit 100 to No No 100 to 240 VAC
240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC (80 to 276 VAC) 2)
60 to 250 VDC
(46.25 to 300 VDC)
2 x power supply units 100 Yes Yes 100 to 240 VAC
to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC (80 to 276 VAC) 2)
60 to 250 VDC
(46.25 to 300 VDC)
1) With a redundant 24 VDC power supply, "L1" must be connected on both power supply units.
2) AC 50/60 Hz ±5 %

Table 8- 53 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss

Device variant Device version Current consumption Effective power loss

(power supply)
X302-7ECC 24 to 48 VDC 0.8 to 0.4 A 17 W
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 0.4 to 0.3 A (AC) 18 to 19 W (AC)
VDC 0.3 to 0.1 A (DC) 17 to 18 W (DC)
X307-2ECC 24 to 48 VDC 0.5 to 0.3 A 12 W
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 0.3 to 0.2 A (AC) 12 to 13 W (AC)
VDC 0.3 to 0.1 A (DC) 12 to 13 W (DC)

SCALANCE X-300
178 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

Table 8- 54 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection

Device version Overcurrent protection of the power supply

(power supply) Non-replaceable fuse
1 power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC 1 x T4A / 125 V
2 power supply units 24 to 48 VDC 2 x T4A / 125 V
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 1 x T4A / 250 V (AC)
60 to 250 VDC 1 x T4A / 300 V (DC)
2 x power supply units 100 to 240 VAC / 2 x T4A / 250 V (AC)
60 to 250 VDC 2 x T4A / 300 V (DC)

Table 8- 55 Electrical data: Signaling contact

Device version Voltage via signaling contact Switching capacity

(power supply) (resistive load)
24 to 48 VDC 24 VDC max. 0.1 A
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 240 VAC max. 5 A
VDC 60 VDC max. 0.4 A
125 VDC max. 0.22 A
250 VDC max. 0.11 A

Table 8- 56 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact

Device version Power supply Signaling contact

(power supply)
1 power supply unit 24 to 48 1 x 4-pin male connector 1 x 2-pin male connector
VDC
2 power supply units 24 to 48 2 x 4-pin male connector 2 x 2-pin connector 1)
VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 1 x 3-pin male connector 1 x 3-pin male connector
VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply units 100 to 2 x 3-pin male connector 2 x 3-pin connector 1)
240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
1) For redundant design connect the signaling contacts in parallel.

Table 8- 57 Electrical data: Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input

Transmitter output (optical) 1) Receiver input 1)

min. [dBm] max. [dBm] Sensitivity min. [dBm] Input power max. [dBm]
-19 -14 -32 -14
1) Values for glass fiber: 62.5 to 125 μm multimode

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 179
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

Table 8- 58 Overvoltage category

General Overvoltage category II

In the application range of EN 60255-27 Overvoltage category III

8.5.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 59 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 75 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m

Table 8- 60 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24 with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 0 to 90 m
AWG 4×2
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 60 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord

Table 8- 61 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet)

Fiber-optic cable type Permitted cable length Attenuation

62.5/125 μm 0 to 5 km ≤1 dB/km at 1 310 nm; 1 200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss
50/125 μm, 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link
power margin

SCALANCE X-300
180 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

8.5.4 Other properties

Table 8- 62 Switching properties

Max. number of learnable addresses 8 000

Aging time 30 sec
Switching technique Store and forward
Latency 5 μs

Table 8- 63 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms

Redundancy mechanism Reconfiguration times

HSR 300 ms
Standby link 300 ms
MRP 200 ms

Table 8- 64 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

Device variant Device version MTBF

X302-7EEC 1 x power supply unit 24 VDC 27.2 years
2 x power supply unit 24 VDC 19.6 years
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 22.8 years
60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 15.3 years
60 to 250 VDC
X307-2EEC 1 x power supply unit 24 VDC 29.9 years
2 x 24 VDC power supply unit 20.9 years
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 24.6 years
60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 16.1 years
60 to 250 VDC

Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all
ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 181
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC

Table 8- 65 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames per second At a frame length of

At 100 Mbps At 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64 bytes
84459 844595 128 bytes
45290 452899 256 bytes
23496 234962 512 bytes
11973 119732 1024 bytes
9615 96154 1280 bytes
8127 81274 1518 bytes

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When
a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.

SCALANCE X-300
182 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific
device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the
product group.

8.6.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 66 Construction

Device version Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Degree of protection

(power supply)
1 x 24 VDC 483 × 44 × 305 mm 6 500 g IP20
2 x 24 VDC 483 × 44 × 305 mm 6 800 g IP20
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 483 × 44 × 305 mm 6 600 g IP20
2 x 100 to 240 VAC 483 × 44 × 305 mm 7 000 g IP20

Table 8- 67 Installation options

Device version Installation options

(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC 19" rack 1)
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 19" rack 1)
1) Note: If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more
detailed information in the section "Mechanical load in operation".

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 183
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

Table 8- 68 Permitted environmental conditions depending on the media modules used

Media module 1) Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature 2) humidity in temperature at operating
operation at 25 °C altitude
Without media module -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
-40 °C to +70 °C condensation) max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
-40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM991-2, -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM991-2 (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C condensation) max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
MM991-2LD, Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
MM991-2LD (SC), -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
MM992-2, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
MM992-2LD, max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2CU,
MM992-2CUC
MM991-2LH+ (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM992-2LH, Max. 2 modules in condensation) With more than 2
MM992-2LH+, slots 11 and 12: modules:
MM992-2ELH -40 °C to +60 °C max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
With more than 2 max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
modules or other slot With more than 2
assignment: modules:
-40 °C to +50 °C max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
Vertical installation: max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
-40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m

SCALANCE X-300
184 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

Media module 1) Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature 2) humidity in temperature at operating
operation at 25 °C altitude
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP -40 °C to +70 °C condensation) max. 65 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: SFP transceivers of max. 60 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1. this group may only be When using other
SFP991-1LD, used in conjunction modules:
SFP992-1. with media modules max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1LD MM992-2CUC and max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2CU. When Vertical installation:
using other modules: max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
-40 °C to +60 °C max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
Vertical installation:
-40 °C to +50 °C
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP Max. 2 modules in condensation) max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: slots 11 and 12: max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1LH+, -40 °C to +60 °C Vertical installation:
SFP992-1LH, With more than 2 max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1LH+, modules or other slot max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP992-1ELH assignment:
SFP991-1ELH200 -40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical installation:
-40 °C to +50 °C
1) Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the
WBM or the CLI.
2) The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if
the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 185
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

8.6.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 69 Connection for end devices or network components

Max. number 24 ports

Electrical 16 x RJ-45 jacks
10/100/1000 Mbps
Media module slots 4 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
Diagnostics port RJ-11 jack

Table 8- 70 Electrical data: Power supply

Device version Redundant Redundant power Power supply

(power supply) power supply supply possible (min./max. range)
unit
1 x 24 to 48 VDC No Yes 24 to 48 VDC
(19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
2 x 24 to 48 VDC Yes Yes 24 to 48 VDC
(19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / No No 100 to 240 VAC
60 to 250 VDC (80 to 276 VAC)
60 to 250 VDC
(48 to 300 VDC)
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / Yes No 100 to 240 VAC
60 to 250 VDC (80 to 276 VAC)
60 to 250 VDC
(48 to 300 VDC)

Table 8- 71 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss

Device version Current consumption Effective power loss

(power supply)
24 to 48 VDC 1.6 to 0.75 A 40 W
100 to 240 VAC / 0.6 to 0.37 A (AC) 42 W (AC)
60 to 250 VDC 0.7 to 0.17 A (DC) 42 W (DC)

SCALANCE X-300
186 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

Table 8- 72 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection

Device version Overcurrent protection of the power supply

(power supply) Non-replaceable fuse
1 x 24 to 48 VDC 1 x T2H / 250 V
2 x 24 to 48 VDC 2 x T2H / 250 V
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 1 x T2H / 250 V (AC)
60 to 250 VDC 1 x T2H / 300 V (DC)
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 2 x T2H / 250 V (AC)
60 to 250 VDC 2 x T2H / 300 V (DC)

Table 8- 73 Electrical data: Signaling contact

Device version Voltage via signaling contact Switching capacity

(power supply) (resistive load)
24 to 48 VDC 24 VDC max. 0.1 A
100 to 240 VAC / 240 VAC max. 5 A
60 to 250 VDC 60 VDC max. 0.4 A
125 VDC max. 0.22 A
250 VDC max. 0.11 A

Table 8- 74 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact

Device version Power supply Signaling contact

(power supply)
1 x 24 to 48 VDC 1 x 4-pin 1 x 2-pin
2 x 24 to 48 VDC 2 x 4-pin 2 x 2-pin
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 1 x 3-pin 1 x 3-pin
60 to 250 VDC
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 2 x 3-pin 2 x 3-pin
60 to 250 VDC

Table 8- 75 Overvoltage category

General Overvoltage category II

In the application range of EN 60255-27 Overvoltage category III

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 187
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

8.6.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 76 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 75 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m

Table 8- 77 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24 with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 0 to 90 m
AWG 4×2
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 60 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord

Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP
transceivers.

SCALANCE X-300
188 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

8.6.4 Block architecture

Block architecture with SCALANCE XR-300 devices

The XR324-12M and XR324-4M handle the Ethernet frame traffic of the 24 ports with the aid
of three switch blocks.
● The three switch blocks are connected in series (block 1 via block 2 to block 3)
● Gigabit wire speed is possible within a block (max. 8 ports per block).
● Between the blocks there is a bandwidth of 1 gigabit/s available,that must be shared by
all ports for frame traffic between the blocks.
When operating solely with Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), the XR devices support full wire
speed via all blocks.

1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

7 8 9 10 11 12

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s

Figure 8-3 Block architecture of the XR324-12M

1 2 3
1 2

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P1 P2 P1 P2

3 4

P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P1 P2 P1 P2

1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s

Figure 8-4 Block architecture of the XR324-4M

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 189
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications

8.6.5 Other properties

Table 8- 78 Switching properties

Max. number of learnable addresses 8 000

Aging time 30 sec
Switching technique Store and forward
Latency 5 μs

Table 8- 79 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms

Redundancy mechanism Reconfiguration times

HSR 300 ms
Standby link 300 ms
MRP 200 ms

Table 8- 80 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

Device version (power supply) MTBF 1)

1 x 24 VDC or > 15 years
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
2 x 24 VDC or > 15 years 2)
2 x 100 to 240 VAC
1) These times apply to the mounting device without media modules.
2) The redundant power supply unit increases the reliability of the system. The MTBF value of the
power supply unit is > 20 years.

Table 8- 81 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames per second At a frame length of

At 100 Mbps At 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64 bytes
84459 844595 128 bytes
45290 452899 256 bytes
23496 234962 512 bytes
11973 119732 1024 bytes
9615 96154 1280 bytes
8127 81274 1518 bytes

SCALANCE X-300
190 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When
a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.

8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific
device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the
product group.

8.7.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 82 Construction

Dimensions (W x H x D) 120 × 125 × 124 mm

Weight 1 150 g
Degree of protection IP20

Table 8- 83 Installation options

Installation options • DIN rail 1)

• S7-300 standard rail
• Wall

1) Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35
mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 191
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

Table 8- 84 Permitted ambient conditions

Media module 1) Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature 2) humidity in operation temperature at operating
at 25 °C altitude
Without media module -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
-40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000
Vertical installation: m
-40 °C to +45 °C max. 50 °C as of 3 000
m
Vertical installation:
max. 40 °C as of 2 000
m
max. 35 °C as of 3 000
m
MM991-2, -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM991-2 (SC), -40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000
MM991-2LD, Vertical installation: m
MM991-2LD (SC), -40 °C to +45 °C max. 50 °C as of 3 000
MM992-2, m
MM992-2LD, Vertical installation:
MM992-2CU, max. 40 °C as of 2 000
MM992-2CUC m
max. 35 °C as of 3 000
m
MM991-2LH+ (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM992-2LH, -40 °C to +50 °C condensation) max. 45 °C as of 2 000
MM992-2LH+, Vertical installation: m
MM992-2ELH -40 °C to +45 °C max. 40 °C as of 3 000
m
Vertical installation:
max. 40 °C as of 2 000
m
max. 35 °C as of 3 000
m

SCALANCE X-300
192 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

Media module 1) Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature 2) humidity in operation temperature at operating
at 25 °C altitude
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP -40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000
transceivers: Vertical installation: m
SFP991-1. -40 °C to +45 °C max. 50 °C as of 3 000
SFP991-1LD, m
SFP992-1. Vertical installation:
SFP992-1LD max. 40 °C as of 2 000
m
max. 35 °C as of 3 000
m
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP -40 °C to +50 °C condensation) max. 45 °C as of 2 000
transceivers: Vertical installation: m
SFP991-1LH+, -40 °C to +45 °C max. 40 °C as of 3 000
SFP992-1LH, m
SFP992-1LH+, Vertical installation:
SFP992-1ELH max. 40 °C as of 2 000
SFP991-1ELH200 m
max. 35 °C as of 3 000
m
1) Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the
WBM or the CLI.
2) The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if
the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 193
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

8.7.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 85 Connection for end devices or network components

Max. number 8 ports

Electrical 4 x RJ-45 jacks, MDI-X pinning,
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/full duplex)
power supply for connected devices (PDs) using
Power over Ethernet (PoE) according to
IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1)
Media module slots 2 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.

Table 8- 86 Electrical data I

Power supply 24 VDC (19.2 to 28.8 V)

Current consumption 2A
Max. power consumption 48 W
(incl. PoE power supply of the connected PoE
devices (PDs))
Power loss at 24 VDC 17 W
Overcurrent protection of the power supply 3 A / 32 V and
Non-replaceable fuse 5 A / 125 V (PoE)
Redundant power supply unit No
Redundant power supply possible Yes

Table 8- 87 Electrical data: Signaling contact

Voltage via signaling contact 24 VDC

Switching capacity (resistive load) max. 100 mA

Table 8- 88 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact

Power supply 1 x 4-pin male connector

Signaling contact 1 x 2-pin male connector

SCALANCE X-300
194 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

Table 8- 89 Power over Ethernet at port P1, P2, P3, P4

PoE function within a power supply system According to IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1) for
environment A
Method of PoE power feed Alternative A
(refer to the following table for the pin
assignment)
Reserved power per port 15.4 W at port,
of which the following can be used by the PD:
12.95 W
Overall power on all 4 ports Max. 30.8 W

Table 8- 90 Electrical isolation

Between the ports No

Between ports and ground Yes
Between ports and 24 VDC power input Yes

Table 8- 91 Pin assignment of the Ethernet ports of the SCALANCE PoE switch

Pin number / wire 1) Assignment for data Assignment for power transfer
transmission (PoE).
Alternative A (MDI-X)
Pin 1 RX+ V-
Pin 2 RX- V-
Pin 3 TX+ V+
Pin 4 - -
Pin 5 - -
Pin 6 TX- V+
Pin 7 - -
Pin 8 - -
1) with 4-wire industrial twisted-pair cables, the wires are connected to pins 1, 2, 3 and 6.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 195
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

8.7.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 92 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 75 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m

Table 8- 93 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24 with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 0 to 90 m
AWG 4×2
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 60 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord

Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP
transceivers.

SCALANCE X-300
196 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications

8.7.4 Other properties

Table 8- 94 Switching properties

Max. number of learnable addresses 8 000

Aging time 30 sec
Switching technique Store and forward
Latency 5 μs

Table 8- 95 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms

Redundancy mechanism Reconfiguration times

HSR 300 ms
Standby link 300 ms
MRP 200 ms

Table 8- 96 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

MTBF > 30 years 1)

1) The time information applies to the mounting device without media modules.

Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all
ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.

Table 8- 97 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames per second At a frame length of

At 100 Mbps At 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64 bytes
84459 844595 128 bytes
45290 452899 256 bytes
23496 234962 512 bytes
11973 119732 1024 bytes
9615 96154 1280 bytes
8127 81274 1518 bytes

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 197
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When
a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.

8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific
device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the
product group.

SCALANCE X-300
198 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

8.8.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 98 Construction

Dimensions (W x H x D) 449 × 43.6 × 305 mm

Weight 6 800 g
Degree of protection IP20 (with closed service panel)

Table 8- 99 Installation options

Device version Installation options

(power supply)
24 VDC • 19" rack
• Desktop operation with adhesive feet
100 to 240 VAC 19" rack

Table 8- 100 Permitted environmental conditions depending on the media modules used

Media module 1) Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature 2) humidity in temperature at operating
operation at 25 °C altitude
Without media module -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
-40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
-40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM991-2, -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM991-2 (SC), -40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
MM991-2LD, Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
MM991-2LD (SC), -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
MM992-2, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
MM992-2LD, max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2CU,
MM992-2CUC
MM991-2LH+ (SC), -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
MM992-2LH, Max. 2 modules in condensation) max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
MM992-2LH+, slots 11 and 12: max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
MM992-2ELH -40 °C to +60 °C Vertical installation:
With more than 2 max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
modules or other slot max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical installation:
-40 °C to +50 °C

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 199
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

Media module 1) Storage/transport Operating temperature Max. relative Max. ambient

temperature 2) humidity in temperature at operating
operation at 25 °C altitude
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP -40 °C to +60 °C condensation) max. 55 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: Vertical installation: max. 50 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1. -40 °C to +50 °C Vertical installation:
SFP991-1LD, max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1. max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP992-1LD
MM992-2SFP and the -40 °C to +70 °C Horizontal installation: < 95 % (no Horizontal installation:
following SFP Max. 2 modules in condensation) max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
transceivers: slots 11 and 12: max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP991-1LH+, -40 °C to +60 °C Vertical installation:
SFP992-1LH, With more than 2 max. 45 °C as of 2 000 m
SFP992-1LH+, modules or other slot max. 40 °C as of 3 000 m
SFP992-1ELH assignment:
SFP991-1ELH200 -40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical installation:
-40 °C to +50 °C
1) Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the
WBM or the CLI.
2) The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if
the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.

8.8.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 101 Connection for end devices or network components

Max. number 24 ports

Electrical Port 1 to 8
8 x RJ-45 jacks, MDI-X pinning,
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/full duplex)
power supply for connected devices (PDs) using
Power over Ethernet (PoE) according to
IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1)
Port 9 to 16:
8 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
Media module slots 4 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
Diagnostics port RJ-11 jack

SCALANCE X-300
200 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

Table 8- 102 Electrical data: Power supply

Device version Redundant Redundant power Power supply

(power supply) power supply unit supply possible
24 VDC No Yes 12 VDC
(19.2 to 28.8 VDC)
100 to 240 VAC No No 100 to 240 VAC
(85 to 264 V)

Table 8- 103 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss

Device version Current consumption Effective power loss Max. power consumption 1)
(power supply)
24 VDC 4.2 A 46 W 100 W
100 to 240 VAC 1,3 ... 0.7 A 42 W 96 W
1) incl. PoE power supply of the connected PoE devices (PDs)

Table 8- 104 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection

Device version Overcurrent protection of the power supply

(power supply) Non-replaceable fuse
24 VDC T 5 A / 250 V
100 to 240 VAC T 2 A / 500 V

Table 8- 105 Electrical data: Signaling contact

Voltage via signaling contact 24 VDC

Switching capacity (resistive load) max. 100 mA

Table 8- 106 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact

Device version Power supply Signaling contact

(power supply)
24 VDC 1 x 4-pin 1 x 2-pin
100 to 240 VAC 1 x 2-pin 1 x 2-pin

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 201
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

Table 8- 107 Power over Ethernet at port P1 to P8

PoE function within a power supply system According to IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1) for
environment A
Method of PoE power feed Alternative A
(refer to the following table for the pin
assignment)
Reserved power per port 15.4 W at port,
of which the following can be used by the PD:
12.95 W
Overall power on all PoE ports Max. 53.2 W

Table 8- 108 Electrical isolation

Between ports P1 to P8 No
Between ports P9 to P16 Yes
Between port groups Yes
P1 to P8 and P9 to P16
Between ports and ground Yes
Between ports and 24 VDC / 230 VAC power Yes
input

Table 8- 109 Pin assignment of the Ethernet ports of the SCALANCE PoE switch

Pin number / wire 1) Assignment for data Assignment for power transfer
transmission (PoE).
Alternative A (MDI-X)
Pin 1 RX+ V-
Pin 2 RX- V-
Pin 3 TX+ V+
Pin 4 - -
Pin 5 - -
Pin 6 TX- V+
Pin 7 - -
Pin 8 - -
1) with 4-wire industrial twisted-pair cables, the wires are connected to pins 1, 2, 3 and 6.

SCALANCE X-300
202 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

8.8.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 110 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 75 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m

Table 8- 111 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)

Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, Permitted cable length

TP cord)
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24 with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 0 to 90 m
AWG 4×2
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 60 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 0 to 90 m
AWG + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord

Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP
transceivers.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 203
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

8.8.4 Block architecture

Block architecture of the SCALANCE XR-300M PoE

The XR-300M PoE handles the Ethernet frame traffic of the 24 ports with the aid of three
switch blocks.
● The three switch blocks are connected in series (block 1 via block 2 to block 3).
● Gigabit wire speed is possible within a block (max. 8 ports per block).
● Between the blocks there is a bandwidth of 1 gigabit/s available,that must be shared by
all ports for frame traffic between the blocks.
When operating solely with Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), the XR devices support full wire
speed via all blocks.

1 2 3
1 2

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P1 P2 P1 P2

3 4

P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P1 P2 P1 P2

1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s

Figure 8-5 Block architecture of the XR324-4M PoE

SCALANCE X-300
204 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications

8.8.5 Other properties

Table 8- 112 Switching properties

Max. number of learnable addresses 8 000

Aging time 30 sec
Switching technique Store and forward
Latency 5 μs

Table 8- 113 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms

Redundancy mechanism Reconfiguration times

HSR 300 ms
Standby link 300 ms
MRP 200 ms

Table 8- 114 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

MTBF > 15 years 1)

1) The time information applies to the mounting device without media modules.

Table 8- 115 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames per second At a frame length of

At 100 Mbps At 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64 bytes
84459 844595 128 bytes
45290 452899 256 bytes
23496 234962 512 bytes
11973 119732 1024 bytes
9615 96154 1280 bytes
8127 81274 1518 bytes

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When
a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 205
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications

8.9 MM900 technical specifications

Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that are not specific to a product
version, apply to the MM900 media module.

8.9.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions

Table 8- 116 Construction

Dimensions (W x H x D) 60 × 22 × 100 mm
Weight 80 g

Table 8- 117 Operating temperature depending on the media modules used 1) 2)

Type Installation Without MM992-2CUC MM991-2LH+ Media module Media module

location media MM992-2CU (SC) MM992-2SFP MM992-2SFP
module MM992-2M12 MM992-2LH with SFP with SFP
MM991-2 MM992-2LH+ transceiver transceiver
MM991-2LD MM992-2ELH SFP991-1 SFP991-1LH+
MM991-2 (SC) SFP991-1LD SFP992-1LH
MM991-2LD (SC) SFP992-1 SFP992-1LH+
MM992-2 SFP992-1LD SFP992-1ELH
MM992-2LD SFP991-1ELH200
X-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +60 °C
Vertical -40 °C to +50 °C
X-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
PoE Vertical -40 °C to +45 °C
XR-300M Horizontal Not possible -40 °C to +70 °C Maximum 2 -40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2
(fully modular modules in slots modules in slots 11
device) 11 and 12: and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 With more than 2
modules or other modules or other
slot assignment: slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical Not possible -40 °C to +50 °C
(fully modular
device)

SCALANCE X-300
206 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications

Type Installation Without MM992-2CUC MM991-2LH+ Media module Media module

location media MM992-2CU (SC) MM992-2SFP MM992-2SFP
module MM992-2M12 MM992-2LH with SFP with SFP
MM991-2 MM992-2LH+ transceiver transceiver
MM991-2LD MM992-2ELH SFP991-1 SFP991-1LH+
MM991-2 (SC) SFP991-1LD SFP992-1LH
MM991-2LD (SC) SFP992-1 SFP992-1LH+
MM992-2 SFP992-1LD SFP992-1ELH
MM992-2LD SFP991-1ELH200
XR-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2 -40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2
PoE modules in slots modules in slots 11
11 and 12: and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 With more than 2
modules or other modules or other
slot assignment: slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical -40 °C to +50 °C
XR-300M Horizontal -40 °C to +70 °C Maximum 2 -40 °C to +70 °C Maximum 2
EEC modules in slotsSFP transceivers modules in slots 11
11 and 12: of this group can and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C only be used in -40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 conjunction with With more than 2
modules or other media modules modules or other
slot assignment: MM992-2CUC slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C and -40 °C to +50 °C
MM992-2CU.
When using other
modules:
-40 °C to +60 °C
Vertical -40 °C to +50 °C
1) Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the
WBM or the CLI.
2) The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if
the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.

Table 8- 118 Permitted ambient conditions

Storage/transport temperature -40 °C to +70 °C

Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C < 95 % (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude As of 2 000 m:
-5 °C of the max. operating temperature1)
As of 3 000 m:
-10 °C of the max. operating temperature1)
1) See table: "Operating temperature depending on the media modules used"

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 207
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications

8.9.2 Connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 119 Interfaces

Product variant Interfaces

MM992-2CUC 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar
MM992-2CU 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 port electrical without securing collar
MM992-2M12 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, GE M12 connector electrical
MM991-2 2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC ports optical, multimode FO cable,
up to max. 3 km
MM991-2LD 2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC ports optical, single mode FO cable,
up to max. 26 km
MM991-2 (SC) 2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode FO cable,
up to max. 5 km
MM991-2LD (SC) 2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable,
up to max. 26 km
MM991-2LH+ (SC) 2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable,
up to max. 70 km
MM992-2 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode FO cable,
up to max. 750 m
MM992-2LD 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable,
up to max. 10 km
MM992-2LH 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable,
up to max. 40 km
MM992-2LH+ 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable,
up to max. 70 km
MM992-2ELH 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable,
up to max. 120 km
MM992-2SFP1) 2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP media module, optical LC ports with corresponding
SFP transceivers.

Table 8- 120 Power supply

Power supply (24 VDC SELV)

The media modules are supplied with power by the SCALANCE device. No
other power supply is permitted.

SCALANCE X-300
208 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications

Table 8- 121 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss I

Product variant Current consumption Effective power loss

MM992-2CUC 70 mA 1.65 W
MM992-2CU 70 mA 1.65 W
MM992-2M12 70 mA 1.65 W
MM991-2 100 mA 2.42 W
MM991-2LD 80 mA 2.04 W
MM991-2 (SC) 100 mA 2.42 W
MM991-2LD (SC) 80 mA 2.04 W
MM991-2LH+ (SC) 80 mA 2.04 W
MM992-2 70 mA 1.76 W
MM992-2LD 80 mA 1.95 W
MM992-2LH 90 mA 2.11 W
MM992-2LH+ 100 mA 2.42 W
MM992-2ELH 110 mA 2.75 W

Table 8- 122 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss II

MM992-2SFP with Current consumption Effective power loss

SFP991-1 60 mA 1.54 W
SFP991-1LD 60 mA 1.54 W
SFP991-1LH+ 70 mA 1.65 W
SFP992-1 60 mA 1.38 W
SFP992-1LD 70 mA 1.60 W
SFP992-1LH 70 mA 1.71 W
SFP992-LH+ 80 mA 1.93 W
SFP992-1ELH 100 mA 2.31 W
SFP991-1ELH200 100 mA 2.31 W

Note
Fusing and signal contacts with media modules
The MM900 media modules do not have their own fuses and have no signaling contacts.
The fuses and the signaling contacts exist in the SCALANCE device.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 209
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications

Table 8- 123 Electrical data: Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input

Product variant Transmitter output (optical) Receiver input

min. [dBm] max. [dBm] Sensitivity min. [dBm] Input power max.
[dBm]
MM992-2CUC - - - -
MM992-2CU - - - -
MM992-2M122) - - - -
MM991-2 -19 -14 -32 -3
MM991-2LD -15 -8 -34 -3
MM991-2 (SC) -19 -14 -34 -3
MM991-2LD (SC) -15 -8 -32 -3
MM991-2LH+ (SC) -5 0 -34 -3
MM992-2 -9.5 -4 -17 -3
MM992-2LD -9.5 -3 -21 -3
MM992-2LH -6 0 -23 -3
MM992-2LH+ 0 5 -23 -3
MM992-2ELH 0 5 -30 -3
MM992-2SFP1) - - - -

1) You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver

SFP/SFP+".
2)The ports of the MM992-2M12 only meet the requirements according to Environment A
(IEEE 802.3), in other words, the electrical isolation of the ports is designed for 500 Vrms (1
minute).

8.9.3 Cable lengths

Table 8- 124 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)

Cable type Lead Permitted cable length

MM992-2CUC IE TP torsion cable with 0 to 45 m
MM992-2CU IE FC Outlet RJ-45 + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
MM992-2M12 IE TP torsion cable 0 to 55 m
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
IE FC TP marine/trailing/flexible cable 0 to 75 m
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP marine/trailing/flexible cable 0 to 85 m
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
IE FC TP standard cable with 0 to 90 m
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 + 10 m TP cord + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP standard cable 0 to 100 m
with IE FC RJ-45 plug 180

SCALANCE X-300
210 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications

Table 8- 125 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet)

Product variant Fiber-optic cable Max. permittted Attenuation

type cable length
MM991-2 50/125 µm 5 km ≤1 dB/km at 1 310 nm; 1 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable
attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
62.5/125 µm 5 km ≤3.1 dB/km at 850 nm; 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
MM991-2LD 9/125 µm 26 km ≤0.5 dB/km at 1 310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5
single mode fiber dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2
dB link power margin
MM991-2 (SC) 50/125 µm 5 km ≤1 dB/km at 1 310 nm; 1 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable
attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
MM991-2LD (SC) 9/125 µm 26 km ≤0.5 dB/km at 1 310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5
single mode fiber dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2
dB link power margin
MM991-2LH+ (SC) 9/125 µm 70 km ≤0.28 dB/km at 1 550 nm; maximum insertion loss
single mode fiber 0.5 dB; 26 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation
at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable
attenuation 3 dB
MM992-2 62.5/125 µm 350 m ≤3.1 dB/km at 850 nm; 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
50/125 µm 750 m ≤2.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 200 MHz×km; maximum
multimode fiber insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
MM992-2LD 9/125 µm 10 km ≤0.5 dB/km at 1 310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5
single mode fiber dB; 6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3
dB link power margin
MM992-2LH 9/125 µm 40 km ≤0.4 dB/km at 1 550 nm; maximum insertion loss
single mode fiber 0.5 dB; 18 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation
at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable
attenuation 3 dB
MM992-2LH+ 9/125 µm 70 km ≤0.28 dB/km at 1 550 nm; maximum insertion loss
single mode fiber 0.5 dB; 21 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation
at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable
attenuation 8 dB
MM992-2ELH 9/125 µm 120 km ≤0.225 dB/km at 1 550 nm; maximum insertion loss
single mode fiber 0.5 dB; 27 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation
at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable
attenuation 8 dB

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 211
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications

Table 8- 126 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable/fiber-optic cable) for the SFP media module

Product variant Max. permittted cable length

MM992-2SFP*) Depending on the SFP transceiver used.

You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver
*)

SFP/SFP+".

8.9.4 Other properties

Table 8- 127 Mean time between failure (MTBF)

Device version (power supply) MTBF

MM992-2CUC, > 250 years
MM992-2CU,
MM992-2M12
MM991-2, > 140 years
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD, > 115 years
MM991-2LD (SC),
MM992-2LD
MM991-2LH+, > 105 years
MM992-2LH.
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2 > 135 years
MM992-2ELH > 95 years
MM992-2SFP1) > 250 years 2)
1) You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver SFP/SFP+".
2) empty

SCALANCE X-300
212 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

8.10 SFP technical specifications

8.10.1 SFP construction, installation and environment

Table 8- 128 Construction

Device: (Variant) Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight IP degree of

Transceiver [in mm] [in g] protection

SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20

optical, multimode glass,
up to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20
optical, multimode glass,
up to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5 20 IP20
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 120km)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 213
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

Table 8- 129 Installation options (modular)

Device: (Variant) Modular installation options:

Transceiver Media module installation in slot SFP installation in SFP media module

SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, - ●

multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single - ●
mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single - ●
mode glass, up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, - ●
multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, - ●
single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, - ●
single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, - ●
single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, - ●
single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
*) Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35 mm DIN rail does not provide
adequate support.

SCALANCE X-300
214 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

Table 8- 130 Permitted ambient conditions

Device: (Variant) Operating Storage/transport Relative humidity Operating

transceiver temperature temperature at 25 °C during altitude at max.
operation, xx °C ambient
maximum temperature
SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
multimode glass, up to max. 3 km) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
mode glass, up to max. 26 km) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
mode glass, up to max. 70km) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
multimode glass, up to max. 750m) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
mode glass, up to max. 10km) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
mode glass, up to max. 40km) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
mode glass, up to max. 70km) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single -40 °C through -40 °C to +85 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max.
mode glass, up to max. 120km) +85 °C (no 56 °C
condensation) 3000 m at max.
50 °C

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 215
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

8.10.2 SFP connectors and electrical data

Table 8- 131 Connection of end devices or network components

Device: (Variant) Connection of end devices or network components

Transceiver Max. of which:
number
electrical - optical
over FO cable Single Multi
mode mode
SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port - ●
optical, multimode glass, (100 Mbps)
up to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port ● -
optical, single mode glass, (100 Mbps)
up to max. 26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port ● -
optical, single mode glass, (100 Mbps)
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port - ●
optical, multimode glass, (1000 Mbps)
up to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port ● -
optical, single mode glass, (1000 Mbps)
up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port ● -
optical, single mode glass, (1000 Mbps)
up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port ● -
optical, single mode glass, (1000 Mbps)
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 2 - 1 x LC port ● -
optical, single mode glass, (1000 Mbps)
up to max. 120km)

SCALANCE X-300
216 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

Table 8- 132 Electrical data: Power supply, current consumption and power loss

Device: (Variant) Effective power loss *)

Transceiver

SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 0.36 W

optical, multimode glass, up
to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 0.39 W
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 0.47 W
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 0.33 W
optical, multimode glass, up
to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 0.41 W
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 0.45 W
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 0.50 W
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 0.63 W
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 120km)
*) Note: SFP values in 25 °C environment.

Note
Fusing of transceivers
The SFP transceivers do not have fuses. The fuse is in the modular device (M).

Note
Signaling contact and media modules
The SFP transceivers do not have a signaling contact. The signaling contact is on the
modular device (M).

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 217
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

Table 8- 133 Electrical data: Transmitter output optical and receiver input

Device: (Variant) Transmitter output optical Receiver input

Transceiver min. max. Sensitivity min. max. input power
[dBm] [dBm] [dBm] [dBm]

SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port -19 -14 -32 -3

optical, multimode glass, up
to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port -15 -8 -34 -3
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port -5 0 -34 -3
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port -9.5 -4 -17 -3
optical, multimode glass, up
to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port -9.5 -3 -21 -3
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port -6 0 -23 -3
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 0 5 -23 -3
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 0 5 -32 -8
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 120km)

SCALANCE X-300
218 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

8.10.3 Cable lengths for SFP

Table 8- 134 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic) Fast Ethernet

Device: (Variant) Fiber FO cable lengths

transceiver

SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 50/125 µm multimode 0-3km

optical, multimode glass, up fiber (1 dB/km at 1310 nm;
to max. 3 km) 1200 MHz*km;
maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB
link power margin)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 9/125 µm single 0 -26km
optical, single mode glass, mode fiber (0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm;
up to max. 26 km) maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB
link power margin)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port 9/125 µm single *) -70 km
optical, single mode glass, mode fiber (0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm;
up to max. 70km) maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
26 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB
link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 3 dB)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 219
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

Table 8- 135 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic) gigabit

Device: (Variant) Fiber FO cable lengths

transceiver

SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 62.5/125 µm 0-350m

optical, multimode glass, up multimode fiber (3.1 dB/km at 850 nm;
to max. 750m) 200 MHz*km;
maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB
link power margin)
50/125 µm multimode 0-750 m
fiber (2.5 dB/km at 850 nm;
1200 MHz*km;
maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB
link power margin)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 9/125 µm single 0 -10 km
optical, single mode glass, mode fiber (0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm;
up to max. 10km) maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB
link power margin)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 9/125 µm single *) -40km
optical, single mode glass, mode fiber (0.4 dB/km at 1550 nm;
up to max. 40km) maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
18 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB
link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 3 dB)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 9/125 µm single *) -70 km
optical, single mode glass, mode fiber (0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm;
up to max. 70km) maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
21 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB
link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 8 dB)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port 9/125 µm single *) -120km
optical, single mode glass, mode fiber (0.225 dB/km at 1550 nm;
up to max. 120km) maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
27 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB
link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 13 dB)

SCALANCE X-300
220 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

8.10.4 Other properties of SFP

Table 8- 136 MTBF

Device: (Variant) MTBF

transceiver

SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port > 120 years

optical, multimode glass, up
to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port > 120 years
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port > 120 years
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port > 120 years
optical, multimode glass, up
to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port > 120 years
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port > 120 years
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port > 120 years
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port > 120 years
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 120km)

Note
The IE Switches X-300 support full wire speed switching complying with IEEE 802.3 on all
ports.

The number of packets depends on the packet length according to the IEEE802.3 standard:

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 221
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications

Table 8- 137 Full wire speed switching

Number of frames At a frame length of (in bytes):

at 100 Mbps at 1000 Mbps
148810 1488095 64
84459 844595 128
45290 452899 256
23496 234962 512
11973 119732 1024
9615 96154 1280
8127 81274 1518

Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame propagation time.
When a frame passes through an IE Switch X-300, it is delayed by the Store&Forward
function of the IE Switch X-300
• with a 64 byte frame length by approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• with a 1500 byte frame length by approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means that the more IE Switch X-300 devices the frame passes through, the longer the
frame delay.

SCALANCE X-300
222 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Approvals, certificates, standards 9
9.1 X-300 product group

9.1.1 Approvals, Certificates

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive:
2004/108/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur.
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 223
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group

● Keep to the installation guidelines

The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when
installing and operating the product.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet!
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any
electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

Note
The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

Note for the manufacturers of machines

This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this
product.

SCALANCE X-300
224 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC directive 94/9/EC "Equipment
and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to:
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

ATEX code:
II 3 G Ex nA II T4 KEMA 07 ATEX 0145X
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● EN 60079-15: 2005 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
● and EN 60079-0:2006

FM approval
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4

Notice for Australia

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment

cULus Listed 60E9 I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 225
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group

cULus Approval for Industrial Control Equipment

cULus Listed 69B1
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987

cULus Approval Hazardous Location

cULus Listed 21BP I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
● UL 1604 and UL 2279
or ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

9.1.2 X-300 type plate

Figure 9-1 X-300 specimen type plate

SCALANCE X-300
226 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group

9.1.3 X-300 declaration of conformity

Declaration of Conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

9.1.4 X-300 FDA and IEC approvals

The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:

Type Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements

X304-2FE CLASS 1 LED Product
X306-1LD FE CLASS 1 LASER Product
X307-3 CLASS 1 LASER Product
X307-3LD CLASS 1 LASER Product
X308-2 CLASS 1 LASER Product
X308-2LD CLASS 1 LASER Product
X308-2LH CLASS 1 LASER Product
X308-2LH+ CLASS 1 LASER Product
X310 -
X310FE -
X320-1FE CLASS 1 LED Product
X320-3LD FE CLASS 1 LASER Product

)'$ ,(&

&RPSOLHVZLWK&)5
&/$66/$6(5352'8&7
DQG

Figure 9-2 FDA and IEC approvals

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 227
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group

9.1.5 Overview of the X-300 approvals

Table 9- 1 Overview of the approvals

Type c-UL-us c-UL-us FM1 C-TICK CE ATEX95 E1

for hazardous Zone 21
locations1
UL 60950 1 UL1604 and FM 3611 AS/NZS 2064 EN 61000-6-4 EN 60079- -
CSA C22.2 UL2279 or CL.1, Div.2 (Class A). Class A, 15:2005 , EN
No. 60950 1 ANSI/ISA GP. A.B.C.D EN 61000-6-2 60079-0:2006
12.12.01 T.. II 3 G Ex nA II
CSA C22.2 CL.1, Zone 2, T..
No. 213- GP. IIC, T.. KEMA 07
M1987 ATEX 0145X
Ta:..
CL. 1, Div. 2
GP.A.B.C.D
T..
CL. 1, Zone 2,
GP. IIC, T..
X304-2FE ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X306-1LD FE ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X307-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X307-3LD ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X308-2 ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X308-2LD ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X308-2LH ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X308-2LH+ ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X310 ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X310FE ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X320-1FE ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X320-3LD FE ● ● ● ● ● ● -

1For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
type plate.

Note
Shipbuilding approval
No applications for shipbuilding approvals will be made for the SCALANCE X-300.

SCALANCE X-300
228 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M

9.1.6 X-300 mechanical stability (in operation)

Type IEC 60068-2-6 vibration IEC 60068-2-27 shock

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 15 g, 11 ms duration
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g 6 shocks per axis
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
X304-2FE ● ●
X306-1LD FE ● ●
X307-3 ● ●
X307-3LD ● ●
X308-2 ● ●
X308-2LD ● ●
X308-2LH ● ●
X308-2LH+ ● ●
X310 ● ●
X310FE ● ●
X320-1FE ● ●
X320-3LD FE ● ●

9.2 Product group X-300M

9.2.1 X-300M approvals, certificates

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 229
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive:
2004/108/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur.
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

● Keep to the installation guidelines

The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when
installing and operating the product.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet!
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any
electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

Note
The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

SCALANCE X-300
230 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

Note for the manufacturers of machines

This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this
product.

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC directive 94/9/EC "Equipment
and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to:
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

ATEX code:
II 3 G Ex nA II T4 KEMA 07 ATEX 0145X
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● EN 60079-15: 2005 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
● and EN 60079-0:2006

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 231
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M

FM approval
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4

Notice for Australia

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment

cULus Listed 60E9 I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03

cULus Approval Hazardous Location

cULus Listed 21BP I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
● UL 1604 and UL 2279
or ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

SCALANCE X-300
232 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M

9.2.2 X-300M type plate

Figure 9-3 Specimen X-300M type plate

9.2.3 X-300M conformity certificates

Declaration of Conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 233
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M

9.2.4 X-300M FDA and IEC approvals

The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:

Product line Product Device: (Variant) Fulfills FDA and IEC

group SCALANCE requirements
X-300 X-300M X308-2M - -
X-300 X-300M X308-2M TS - -
Note: In the modular devices (M), the marking is provided by the MM900 media modules and the SFP transceivers.

)'$ ,(&

&RPSOLHVZLWK&)5
&/$66/$6(5352'8&7
DQG

Figure 9-4 FDA and IEC approvals

SCALANCE X-300
234 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M

9.2.5 Overview of X-300M approvals

Table 9- 2 Overview of the approvals

Device: (Variant) c-UL-us c-UL-us FM1 C-TICK CE ATEX95 E1

SCALANCE for Zone 21
hazardous
locations1
UL 60950 UL1604 and FM 3611 AS/NZS EN EN 60079- -
1 UL2279 or CL.1, Div.2 GP. 2064 61000- 15:2005 , EN
CSA ANSI/ISA A.B.C.D T.. (Class A) 6-4 60079-0:2006
C22.2 No. 12.12.01 Class A, II 3 G Ex nA II
CL.1, Zone 2,
60950 1 CSA C22.2 GP. IIC, T.. EN T..
No. 213- 61000- KEMA 07 ATEX
M1987 Ta:.. 6-2 0145X
CL. 1, Div. 2
GP.A.B.C.D
T..
CL. 1, Zone
2, GP. IIC,
T..
X308-2M (-) ● ● ● ● ● ● -
X308-2M TS (-) ● ● ● ● ● ● -

1For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
type plate.

Note
Shipbuilding approval
No applications for shipbuilding approvals will be made for the SCALANCE X-300M.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 235
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M

9.2.6 X-300M mechanical stability (in operation)

Device: (Variant) IEC 60068-2-6 vibration IEC 60068-2-27 shock

SCALANCE
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 15 g, 11 ms duration
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g 6 shocks per axis
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
X308-2M (-) ● ●
X308-2M TS (-) ● ●

9.3 Product group XR-300M

9.3.1 XR-300M approvals, certificates

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive:
2004/108/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

SCALANCE X-300
236 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M

WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur.
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

● Keep to the installation guidelines

The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when
installing and operating the product.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet!
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any
electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

Note
The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 237
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M

Note for the manufacturers of machines

This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this
product.

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment
and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to:
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

ATEX code:
II 3 G Ex nA II T4 KEMA 07 ATEX 0145X
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● EN 60079-15 : 2005 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
● and EN 60079-0:2006

FM approval
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4

Notice for Australia

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

SCALANCE X-300
238 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M

cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment

All variants of the XR-300M EEC with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03

cULus Approval for Industrial Control Equipment

Only the device version with the 100 to 240 VAC power supply has the cULus Ind. Cont. Eq.
approval.
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987

cULus Approval Hazardous Location

All variants of the XR-300M EEC with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
● UL 1604 and UL 2279
or ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 239
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M

9.3.2 XR-300M type plate

Figure 9-5 Specimen XR-300M type plate

9.3.3 XR-300M conformity certificate

Declaration of Conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

SCALANCE X-300
240 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M

9.3.4 XR-300M FDA and IEC approvals

The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:

Product line Product Device: Variant Fulfills FDA and IEC

group SCALANCE requirements
X-300 XR-300M XR324-12M 2 x 24 V DC, cable outlet front -
XR324-12M 1 x 100 to 240 V AC, cable -
outlet front
XR324-12M 2 x 24 V DC, cable outlet rear -
XR324-12M 1 x 100 to 240 V AC, cable -
outlet rear
Note: In the modular devices (M), the marking is provided by the MM900 media modules and the SFP transceivers.

)'$ ,(&

&RPSOLHVZLWK&)5
&/$66/$6(5352'8&7
DQG

Figure 9-6 FDA and IEC approvals

9.3.5 Overview of XR-300M approvals

Note
The 24 V DC variants do not have an E1 approval.
The 100 to 240 V AC variants have C-Tick and CE approvals but are only UL508 listed. They
do not have UL hazloc, FM or ATEX approvals.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 241
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M

Table 9- 3 Overview of the approvals

Device: (Variant) c-UL-us c-UL-us FM1 C-TICK CE ATEX95 E1

SCALANCE for Zone 2 (*)
hazardous
locations (*)
UL 60950 UL1604 and FM 3611 AS/NZS EN EN 60079- -
1 UL2279 or CL.1, Div.2 GP. 2064 61000- 15:2005 , EN
CSA ANSI/ISA A.B.C.D T.. (Class A) 6-4 60079-0:2006
C22.2 No. 12.12.01 Class A, II 3 G Ex nA II
CL.1, Zone 2,
60950 1 CSA C22.2 GP. IIC, T.. EN T..
No. 213- 61000- KEMA 07 ATEX
M1987 Ta:.. 6-2 0145X
CL. 1, Div. 2
GP.A.B.C.D
T..
CL. 1, Zone
2, GP. IIC,
T..
XR324-12M 2 x 24 V DC, cable ● ● ● ● ● ● -
outlet front
XR324-12M 1 x 100 to 240 V *) - - ● ● - -
AC, cable outlet
front
XR324-12M 2 x 24 V DC, cable ● ● ● ● ● ● -
outlet rear
XR324-12M 1 x 100 to 240 V *) - - ● ● - -
AC, cable outlet
rear
*) Note: UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987

(*) For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to
the type plate.

9.3.6 XR-300M mechanical stability (in operation)

Device: (Variant) IEC 60068-2-6 vibration IEC 60068-2-27 shock IEC 60068-2-6 vibration *)
SCALANCE
10 – 58 Hz: 0.15mm 15 g, 11 ms duration 5 – 8.51 Hz: 7 mm
58 – 500 Hz: 1 g 6 shocks per axis 8.51 – 500 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 1 octave/min,
10 cycles 10 cycles
XR324-12M (2 x 24 V DC, cable outlet ● ● ●
front)
XR324-12M (1 x 100...240 V AC, cable ● ● ●
outlet front)
XR324-12M (2 x 24 V DC, cable outlet ● ● ●
rear)
XR324-12M (1 x 100...240 V AC, cable ● ● ●
outlet rear)
*) Note: When rack mounted with 4 securing points

SCALANCE X-300
242 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group

9.4 X-300EEC product group

9.4.1 X-300EEC approvals and certificates

NOTICE
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

The term "the product" as used below includes all device variants of the
SCALANCE X-300EEC unless specific variants are expressly named for an approval.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

Low voltage equipment directive

Devices supplied with 100 to 240 VAC meet the requirements of the directive 2006/95/EC
"Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits” (Low Voltage
Equipment Directive). Evidence of conformity due to adherence to the EN 61131-2:2007
standard, sections 11...14 (safety).

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive 2004/108/EEC
"Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 243
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group

WARNING
Permitted expansions
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

● Installation guidelines
The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety notices
contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and
operating the product.
The very latest documentation is available on the Internet!
You will find the installation instructions documentation on the Internet on the pages of
Siemens Industry Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product process from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first
discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

NOTICE

The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

SCALANCE X-300
244 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

All variants of the X-300EEC with 24 V DC power supply meet the requirements of the EC
directive 94/9/EC "Equipment and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to:
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

ATEX code:
All variants of the X-300EEC with power supply 24 V DC have the following approval:
II 3 G Ex nA II T4
They meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15 : 2005 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
● and EN 60079-0:2006

IEC 61850-3 (EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A)

The product meets the requirements of the standard IEC 61850-3
(EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A).

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 245
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group

IEEE 1613
The product meets the requirements of the standard IEEE 1613 CLASS 1 (electrical ports) or
IEEE 1613 CLASS 2 (optical ports).

FM approval
All variants of the X-300EEC with power supply 24 V DC have the following approval:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4

Notice for Australia

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

cULus Approval for Industrial Control Equipment

Only the device version with the 100 to 240 VAC power supply has the cULus Ind. Cont. Eq.
approval.
cULus Listed
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987

cULus Approval Hazardous Location

All variants of the X-300EEC with power supply 24 V DC have the following approval:
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
● UL 1604 and UL 2279
or ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

SCALANCE X-300
246 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group

9.4.2 X-300EEC declaration of conformity

Declaration of Conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

9.4.3 Overview of the approvals for the X-300EEC

Table 9- 4 Overview of the approvals of the SCALANCE X-300EEC - part 1

SCALANCE X-300EEC: c-UL-us c-UL-us for Hazardous Locations FM1

1)
Device version
UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 FM 3611
CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 UL 1604 and UL 2279 or ANSI / CL.1, Div.2 GP. A.B.C.D; T4
ISA 12.12.01 CL.1, Zone 2, GP. IIC, T4
CL.1, Div.2 Gp.A.B.C.D T4 Ta:..
CL.1, Zone 2, Gp.IIC, T4
Power supply 24 to 48 V DC ● ● ●
Power supply 100 to 240 ● - -
V AC / 60 to 250 V DC
1 For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.

Table 9- 5 Overview of the approvals of the SCALANCE X-300EEC - part 2

SCALANCE X-300EEC: AS C-TICK CE ATEX95

Device version Zone 2 1)
AS/NZS 2064 AS/NZS 2064 EN 61000-6-4 Class A, EN 60079-15:2005
(Class A) (Class A) EN 61000-6-2 EN 60079-0:2006
II 3 G Ex nA II T4
KEMA nn ATEX nnnnX
Power supply 24 to 48 V DC ● ● ● ●
Power supply 100 to 240 V AC ● ● ● -
/ 60 to 250 V DC

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 247
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group

9.4.4 X-300EEC mechanical stability (in operation)

All variants of the IE Switch SCALANCE X-300EEC meet the following requirements for
mechanical stability:
● IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration)
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
● IEC 60068-2-27 (shock)
15 g, 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
For further details, refer to the technical specifications.

9.5 XR-300M EEC product group

9.5.1 XR-300M EEC approvals, certificates

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

Low voltage directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive:
2004/108/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

SCALANCE X-300
248 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group

WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur.
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

● Keep to the installation guidelines

The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when
installing and operating the product.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet!
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any
electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

Note
The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 249
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group

Note for the manufacturers of machines

This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this
product.

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

All variants of the XR-300M EEC with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of the
EC directive 94/9/EC "Equipment and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to:
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

ATEX code:
II 3 G Ex nA II T4 KEMA 07 ATEX 0145X
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● EN 60079-15 : 2005 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
● and EN 60079-0:2006

IEC 61850-3 (EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A)

The product meets the requirements of the standard IEC 61850-3
(EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A).

IEEE 1613
The product meets the requirements of the standard IEEE 1613 CLASS 1 (electrical ports) or
IEEE 1613 CLASS 2 (optical ports).

SCALANCE X-300
250 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group

FM approval
All variants of the XR-300M EEC with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of the
standards
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4

Notice for Australia

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment

All variants of the XR-300M EEC with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03

cULus Approval for Industrial Control Equipment

Only the device version with the 100 to 240 VAC power supply has the cULus Ind. Cont. Eq.
approval.
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987

cULus Approval Hazardous Location

All variants of the XR-300M EEC with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 : 2007
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 251
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group

9.5.2 XR-300M EEC declaration of conformity

Conformity certificate
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

9.5.3 Overview of XR-300M EEC approvals

Note
The 24 V variants do not have an E1 approval.
The 100 to 240 V variants have C-Tick and CE approvals, are only UL508 listed, have no UL
hazloc, FM or ATEX.

SCALANCE X-300
252 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group

Table 9- 6 Overview of the approvals

Device: (Variant) c-UL-us c-UL-us FM1 C-TICK CE ATEX95 E1

SCALANCE for Zone 21
hazardous
locations1
UL 60950 ANSI / ISA FM 3611 AS/NZS EN EN 60079- -
1 12.12.01 CL.1, Div.2 GP. 2064 61000- 15:2005 , EN
CSA CSA C22.2 A.B.C.D T.. (Class A). 6-4 60079-0:2006
C22.2 No. No. 213- Class A, II 3 G Ex nA II
CL.1, Zone 2,
60950 1 M1987 GP. IIC, T.. EN T..
CL. 1, Div. 2 61000- KEMA 07 ATEX
Ta:.. 6-2
GP.A.B.C.D 0145X
T..
CL. 1, Zone
2, GP. IIC,
T..
XR324-4MEEC (1 x 24 V DC, cable ● ● ● ● ● ●
outlet front)
XR324-4MEEC (2 x 24 V DC, cable ● ● ● ● ● ●
outlet front)
XR324-4MEEC (1 x 230 V AC, *) - - ● ● -
cable outlet front)
XR324-4MEEC (2 x 230 V AC, *) - - ● ● -
cable outlet front)
XR324-4MEEC (1 x 24 V DC, cable ● ● ● ● ● ●
outlet rear)
XR324-4MEEC (2 x 24 V DC, cable ● ● ● ● ● ●
outlet rear)
XR324-4MEEC (1 x 230 V AC, *) - - ● ● -
cable outlet rear)
XR324-4MEEC (2 x 230 V AC, *) - - ● ● -
cable outlet rear)

*) Note: UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987

1For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
type plate.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 253
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE

9.5.4 XR-300M EEC mechanical stability (in operation)

The devices of the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC product group meet the following standards
(prerequisite: rack mounted with 4 securing points):
● IEC 60068-2-6
(vibrations during transportation and operation)
Test parameters:
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
● IEC 60068-2-27
(shocks during operation)
Test parameters:
15 g , 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
● IEC 60068-2-6
(vibrations during transportation)
Test parameters:
10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm
85 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps

9.6 Product group X-300M PoE

9.6.1 X-300M PoE approvals, certificates

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

SCALANCE X-300
254 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive 2004/108/EEC
"Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4:2007 EN 61000-6-2:2005

WARNING
Permitted expansions
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

● Keep to the installation guidelines

The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when
installing and operating the product.
The very latest documentation is available on the Internet!
You will find the installation instructions documentation on the Internet on the pages of
Siemens Industry Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any
electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

NOTICE

The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 255
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment
and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to.
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

ATEX code:
II 3 G Ex nA II T4
The product meets the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2005 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
● EN 60079-0:2006

FM approval
The product meets the requirements of the following standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611

SCALANCE X-300
256 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE

Notice for Australia (C-Tick)

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment

cULus Listed I.T.E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with:
● UL 60950-1
● CSA C22.2 No.

cULus Approval Hazardous Location

cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with:
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
● UL 1604 and UL 2279
or ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

9.6.2 X-300M PoE declaration of conformity

Declaration of Conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
> Entry list
> Entry type "Certificates"
> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 257
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE

9.6.3 Overview of X-300M PoE approvals

Table 9- 7 Overview of the approvals of the SCALANCE X-308-2M PoE - part 1

c-UL-us Inf. Tech. Eq. c-UL-us for Hazardous Locations 1) FM

UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 FM 3611
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 UL 1604 and UL 2279 or
ANSI / ISA 12.12.01
CL.1, Div.2 Gp.A.B.C.D T4
CL.1, Zone 2, Gp.IIC, T4
● ● ●
1 For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", 60° C applies.

Table 9- 8 Overview of the approvals of the SCALANCE X-308-2M PoE - part 2

C-TICK CE ATEX95 Zone 2 1)

AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) EN 61000-6-4 Class A, EN 60079-15:2005
EN 61000-6-2 EN 60079-0:2006
II 3 G Ex nA II T4
KEMA nn ATEX nnnnX
● ● ●
1 For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", 60° C applies.

Note
Shipbuilding approval
You will find shipbuilding approvals on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry
Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
Auto-Hotspot
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

SCALANCE X-300
258 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE

9.6.4 X-300M PoE mechanical stability in operation

The switch meets the following requirements for mechanical stability:

IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration)

● Securing on a DIN rail
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps

IEC 60068-2-27 (shock)

● Securing on a DIN rail
15 g, 11 ms duration, 6 shocks per axis

9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE

9.7.1 XR-300M PoE approvals, certificates

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 259
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive 2004/108/EEC
"Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4:2007 EN 61000-6-2:2005

WARNING
Use only approved expansions
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

● Keep to the installation guidelines

The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when
installing and operating the product.
The very latest documentation is available on the Internet!
You will find the installation instructions documentation on the Internet on the pages of
Siemens Industry Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
ID = 8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
ID = 28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any
electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

NOTICE

The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

SCALANCE X-300
260 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

FM approval
All variants of the XR-300M EEC with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of the
standards
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4

Notice for Australia

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment

All variants of the XR-300M PoE with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) complying with:
● Standard UL 60950-1
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report Number E115352

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 261
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE

cULus Approval for Industrial Control Equipment

Only the device version with the 100 to 240 VAC power supply has the cULus Ind. Cont. Eq.
approval.
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with:
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987

cULus Approval Hazardous Location

All variants of the XR-300M PoE with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with:
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 : 2007
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4

9.7.2 X-300M PoE declaration of conformity

Declaration of Conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
> Entry list
> Entry type "Certificates"
> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

SCALANCE X-300
262 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group

9.7.3 XR-300M PoE mechanical stability in operation

The switch meets the following requirements for mechanical stability:

IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration)

● Mounting in the rack: (2-point mounting:)
10 to 58 Hz: 0.075 mm
85 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
● Individual mounting: (4-point mounting):
5 to 8.51 Hz: 3.5 mm
8.51 – 500 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps

IEC 60068-2-27 (shock)

● Mounting in the rack (2-point mounting):
15 g, 11 ms duration, 6 shocks per axis

9.8 MM900 product group

9.8.1 MM900 approvals, certificates

NOTICE
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 263
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive:2004/108/EEC
"Electromagnetic Compatibility".
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

WARNING
Use only approved components
The installation of components, accessories and expansions that are not approved for
SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and
regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use components that are approved for the system.

● Installation guidelines
The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety notices
contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and
operating the product.
The very latest documentation is available on the Internet!
You will find the installation instructions documentation on the Internet on the pages of
Siemens Industry Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product process from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first
discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

Note
The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

SCALANCE X-300
264 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group

Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 2006/42/EEC.

Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this
product.

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment
and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to:
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

The product SCALANCE MM991-2 has the approval:

II 3(2)G Ex nA [op is] IIC T4 DEKRA 11 ATEX 0060 X
These products meet the requirements of the standards
● EN 60079-15: 2005
● EN 60079-0:2006
● EN 60079-28: 2007

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 265
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group

The SCALANCE MM900 media modules have the following approvals:

NOTICE
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

● EN 60079-15 : 2005
EN 60079-0:2006
II 3 G Ex nA II T...
KEMA 07 ATEX 0145X
● c-UL-us
UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
● c-UL-us
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
● c-UL-us for Hazardous Location
UL 1604 and UL 2279
or ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D, T...
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T...
● FM 3611 Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T*
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T*
● AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
(T... / T* = For detailed information on the temperature class, refer to the type plate)

9.8.2 MM900 declaration of conformity

Declaration of Conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

SCALANCE X-300
266 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group

9.8.3 MM900 FDA and IEC approvals

The following MM900 media modules meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:

Media module Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements

MM992-2CUC -
MM992-2CU -
MM992-2M12 -
MM992-2SFP*) -
MM991-2 CLASS 1 LED Product
MM991-2LD CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM991-2 (SC) CLASS 1 LED Product
MM991-2LD (SC) CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM991-2LH+ (SC) CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM992-2 CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM992-2LD CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM992-2LH CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM992-2LH+ CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM992-2ELH CLASS 1 LASER Product
*) You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver SFP/SFP+".

)'$ ,(&

&RPSOLHVZLWK&)5
&/$66/$6(5352'8&7
DQG

Figure 9-7 FDA and IEC approvals

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 267
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

9.9 Product group SFP

9.9.1 SFP approvals, certificates

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.

EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.

EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC Directive:
2004/108/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility"
The product is designed for use in the following areas:

Area of application Requirements

Emission Immunity
Industrial area EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur.
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their
target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic
compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.

SCALANCE X-300
268 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

● Keep to the installation guidelines

The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when
installing and operating the product.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet!
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
8763736 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
– EMC Installation Guideline, Planning Guide
28518276 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28518276)
● Working on the product
To protect the product from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any
electrostatic charge from their body before touching the product.

Note
The product was tested with a device that also complies with the standards listed above.
If the product is operated with a device that does not meet these standards, there is no
guarantee that the corresponding values will be adhered to.

Machinery directive
The product remains a component in compliance with Article 4 (2) of the EC Machinery
Directive 89/392/EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described
is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms
with the directive 89/392/EEC.

Note for the manufacturers of machines

This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this
product.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 269
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

Explosion protection directive (ATEX)

The SIMATIC NET product meets the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment
and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".

WARNING

When using (installing) SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely
sure that the associated conditions are adhered to:
• "Approval of SIMATIC/ SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in Ex-Zone 2"
You will find this on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"

ATEX code:
II 3 G Ex nA II T4 KEMA 07 ATEX 0145X
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● EN 60079-15 : 2005 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
● and EN 60079-0:2006

FM approval
The product meets the requirements of the standards
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4

Notice for Australia

The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).

Note
The SFP transceivers do not have UL listing but a c-UR-us approval (component approval).

SCALANCE X-300
270 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment

cULus Recognized Component I.T.E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03

9.9.2 SFP type plate

Figure 9-8 SFP specimen type plate top

Figure 9-9 SFP specimen type plate bottom

9.9.3 SFP declaration of conformity

Conformity certificate
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the
following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805868
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 271
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

9.9.4 SFP FDA and IEC approvals

The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:

Product line Product Device: (Variant) Fulfills FDA and IEC

group Transceiver requirements
X-300 SFP SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, ●
multimode glass, up to max. 3
km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, ●
single mode glass, up to max.
26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, ●
single mode glass, up to max.
70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ●
optical, multimode glass, up to
max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ●
optical, single mode glass, up
to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ●
optical, single mode glass, up
to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ●
optical, single mode glass, up
to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ●
optical, single mode glass, up
to max. 120km)

)'$ ,(&

&RPSOLHVZLWK&)5
&/$66/$6(5352'8&7
DQG

Figure 9-10 FDA and IEC approvals

SCALANCE X-300
272 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

9.9.5 Overview of the SFP approvals

Note
The SFP transceivers only have UL60950, C-Tick, CE, FM and ATEX approvals.
The other approvals are device approvals and are obtained for the device with the various
components.

Table 9- 9 Overview of the approvals

Device: (Variant) c-UL-us FM1 C-TICK CE ATEX95 E1

Transceiver Zone 21
UL 60950 1 FM 3611 AS/NZS EN EN 60079- -
CSA C22.2 No. 60950 1 CL.1, Div.2 GP. 2064 61000- 15:2005 , EN
A.B.C.D T.. (Class A). 6-4 60079-0:2006
Class A, II 3 G Ex nA II
CL.1, Zone 2,
GP. IIC, T.. EN T..
61000- KEMA 07 ATEX
Ta:.. 6-2 0145X
SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ● ● ● ● -
optical, multimode
glass, up to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ● ● ● ● -
optical, single mode
glass, up to max. 26
km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ● ● ● ● -
optical, single mode
glass, up to max.
70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC ● ● ● ● ● -
port optical, multimode
glass, up to max.
750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC ● ● ● ● ● -
port optical, single
mode glass, up to max.
10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC ● ● ● ● ● -
port optical, single
mode glass, up to max.
40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC ● ● ● ● ● -
port optical, single
mode glass, up to max.
70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC ● ● ● ● ● -
port optical, single
mode glass, up to max.
120km)
SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ● ● ● ● -
optical, multimode
glass, up to max. 3 km)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 273
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

Device: (Variant) c-UL-us FM1 C-TICK CE ATEX95 E1

Transceiver Zone 21
UL 60950 1 FM 3611 AS/NZS EN EN 60079- -
CSA C22.2 No. 60950 1 CL.1, Div.2 GP. 2064 61000- 15:2005 , EN
A.B.C.D T.. (Class A). 6-4 60079-0:2006
Class A, II 3 G Ex nA II
CL.1, Zone 2,
GP. IIC, T.. EN T..
61000- KEMA 07 ATEX
Ta:.. 6-2 0145X
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ● ● ● ● -
optical, single mode
glass, up to max. 26
km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ● ● ● ● -
optical, single mode
glass, up to max.
70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC ● ● ● ● ● -
port optical, single
mode glass, up to max.
120km)

1For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
table of environmental conditions.

Note
Shipbuilding approval
The shipbuilding approval applies to all SFP transceivers.

SCALANCE X-300
274 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

9.9.6 SFP mechanical stability (in operation)

Device: (Variant) IEC 60068-2-6 vibration IEC 60068-2-27 shock

transceiver
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 15 g, 11 ms duration
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g 6 shocks per axis
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
SFP991-1 (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, multimode glass,
up to max. 3 km)
SFP991-1LD (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 26 km)
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, multimode glass,
up to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port ● ●
optical, single mode glass,
up to max. 120km)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 275
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP

SCALANCE X-300
276 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Accessories 10
10.1 Accessories

Table 10- 1 Accessories and order numbers

Product Order number Available for SCALANCE ...

"Industrial Ethernet TP and Fiber Optic Networks" 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0 All switches
manual
Cables and accessories
IE FC Stripping Tool 6GK1901-1GA00 For IE cables
IE FC blade cassettes 6GK1901-1GB00 For stripping tool
IE FC TP standard cable GP 6XV1840-2AH10 All except X200-4P IRT
IE FC TP trailing cable 6XV1840-3AH10 All except X200-4P IRT
IE FC TP marine cable 6XV1840-4AH10 All except X200-4P IRT
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 6XV1870-2D All except X200-4P IRT
IE FC TP flexible cable GP 6XV1870-2B All except X200-4P IRT
IE FC FRNC cable GP 6XV1871-2F All except X200-4P IRT
IE FC TP festoon cable GP 6XV1871-2S All except X200-4P IRT
IE FC TP food cable 6XV1871-2L All except X200-4P IRT
IE TP torsion cable 6XV1870-2F
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 x 2, AWG24 6XV1878-2A (gigabit cable)
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 x 2, AWG24 6XV1878-2B (gigabit cable)
Fast Ethernet connector
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 1 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 For all electrical Fast Ethernet ports
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 10 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 For all electrical Fast Ethernet ports
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 50 6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0 For all electrical Fast Ethernet ports
Gigabit connector
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 4 x 2, pack of 1 6GK1901-1BB11-2AA0 For all electrical gigabit ports
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 4 x 2, pack of 10 6GK1901-1BB11-2AB0 For all electrical gigabit ports
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 4 x 2, pack of 50 6GK1901-1BB11-2AE0 For all electrical gigabit ports
FO connectors and accessories
FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230) 6XV1847-2A
FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230) 6XV1847-2C
Crimp and Cleave assembly case for FC FO system 6GK1900-1GL00-0AB0
FC BFOC connector set with cleaning cloths and 6GK1900-1GB00-0AC0
dust protection cap, pack of 20
FC SC connector set with cleaning cloths and dust 6GK1900-1LB00-0AC0
protection cap,
pack of 20 = 10 duplex connectors
FC BFOC coupler, 10 single couplings 6GK1900-1GP00-0AB0
FC SC coupler, 5 duplex couplings 6GK1900-1LP00-0AB0
C-PLUG
C-PLUG 6GK1900-0AB00 SCALANCE X-200 / X-300 / X-400 / W-700

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 277
Accessories
10.1 Accessories

SCALANCE X-300
278 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Graphics 11
11.1 Dimension drawing

Note
The IE Switches X-300 are available in small, medium and large variants.
The dimension drawings are shown below.

Small design

Figure 11-1 Small design dimension drawing (example used here SCALANCE X306-1LD FE)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 279
Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing

Figure 11-2 Small design dimension drawing (IE Switch X-306)

Medium design

Figure 11-3 Medium design dimension drawing (example used here SCALANCE X308-2)

SCALANCE X-300
280 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing

Figure 11-4 Medium design dimension drawing (IE Switch X-300)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 281
Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing

Large design

Figure 11-5 Large design dimension drawing Part 1 (example used here SCALANCE X320-3LD FE)

Figure 11-6 Large design dimension drawing Part 2 (example used here SCALANCE X320-3LD FE)

SCALANCE X-300
282 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing

Figure 11-7 Large design dimension drawing (IE Switch X-320)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 283
Graphics
11.2 X-300M dimension drawings

11.2 X-300M dimension drawings

Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the X-300M product group.


 

s
SCALANCE
X308-2M





Figure 11-8 X308-2M dimension drawing

SCALANCE X-300
284 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.2 X-300M dimension drawings

Figure 11-9 X308-2M drilling template

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 285
Graphics
11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings

11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings

Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the XR-300M product group.

Figure 11-10 Front view of the XR324-12M

SCALANCE X-300
286 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings

Figure 11-11 XR324-12M from above

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 287
Graphics
11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings

Figure 11-12 XR324-12M from above

SCALANCE X-300
288 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.4 X-300EEC dimension drawings

11.4 X-300EEC dimension drawings

All dimensions in the drawings are in millimeters

Figure 11-13 Dimension drawing IE Switch X302-7EEC - view

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 289
Graphics
11.4 X-300EEC dimension drawings

Figure 11-14 Dimension drawing IE Switch X302-7EEC - side view

Figure 11-15 Dimension drawing IE Switch X302-7EEC - from above

SCALANCE X-300
290 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings

11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings

Figure 11-16 Housing front and rear

Figure 11-17 Top of the housing

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 291
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings

Mounting the IE Switch X-300EEC

CAUTION
Making a mounting support
Suitable mounting supports are necessary for wall mounting and 19" rack mounting. Have
these made according to the drawing.
You will find other accessories, such as screws in the tables. If you have questions, contact
our Customer Support.
You will also find dimension drawings on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry
Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441)
→ "Entry list" tab

SCALANCE X-300
292 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings

Mounting support for EEC wall mounting







ෘ
ෘ







ෘ

ෘ




ෘ




r


Figure 11-18 X-300EEC wall mounting (dimensions in mm)

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 293
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings

Mounting support for 19" rack mounting of the X-300EEC switch

Figure 11-19 Rack mounting of two X-300EECs fastened together (view from below)

Table 11- 1 Legend for rack mounting of two X-300EECs fastened together

No. Number needed Name

1 2 Plate for side
2 12 Spring washer SN60727-4-NrSt
3 12 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032-M4-8
4 1 Mid part of mounting support

SCALANCE X-300
294 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings

Figure 11-20 Side part of mounting support for X-300EEC (dimensions in mm)

Material: Plate 2.0 DIN EN10152 DC01+ZE25/25

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 295
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings

Figure 11-21 Middle part of mounting support for X-300EEC (dimensions in mm)

Material: Plate 2.0 DIN EN10152 DC01+ZE25/25

See also
19" rack mounting - X-300EEC product group (Page 114)

SCALANCE X-300
296 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings

11.6 MM900 dimension drawings

Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the MM900 product group.

Figure 11-22 MM900 dimension drawing 1: Electrical RJ-45 ports with securing collar

Figure 11-23 MM900 dimension drawing 2: Electrical RJ-45 ports without securing collar

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 297
Graphics
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings

Figure 11-24 MM900 dimension drawing 3: BFOC ports

Figure 11-25 MM900 dimension drawing 4: Optical SC ports

SCALANCE X-300
298 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings

Figure 11-26 MM900 dimension drawing 5: SFP media module

60
106,5
9922HA
22

9922HA

Figure 11-27 MM900 dimension drawing 6: M12 ports electrical

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 299
Graphics
11.7 SFP dimension drawings

11.7 SFP dimension drawings

Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the SFP product group.

Note
All dimensions are ± 0.2 mm unless otherwise specified.

Figure 11-28 SFP dimension drawing

SCALANCE X-300
300 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings

11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings

All dimensions in the drawings are in millimeters.

Figure 11-29 X308-2M PoE: Front view

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 301
Graphics
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings

Figure 11-30 X308-2M PoE: Side view

SCALANCE X-300
302 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings

Figure 11-31 X308-2M PoE: Drilling template

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 303
Graphics
11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings

11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings

All dimensions in the drawings are in millimeters.

Figure 11-32 XR324-4M PoE: Front view

Figure 11-33 XR324-4M PoE: Side view

Figure 11-34 XR324-4M PoE: Rear

SCALANCE X-300
304 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Graphics
11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings

Figure 11-35 XR324-4M PoE: From above

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 305
Graphics
11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings

SCALANCE X-300
306 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Appendix A
A.1 TP port

Connector pinout
On the IE Switch X-300, the TP ports are implemented as RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X
assignment (Medium Dependent Interface–Autocrossover) of a network component.

Figure A-1 RJ-45 jack

Table A- 1 Pin assignment

Pin number Pinning of the Fast Ethernet Pinning of the gigabit Ethernet ports
ports on SCALANCE X310 (P8 - P10)
of IE-Switches X-300 (P1-P7) on SCALANCE X308-2, X308-2LD, X308-2LH,
Except: X308-2LH+ (P8)
SCALANCE X310FE (P1-P10)
Pin 8 n. c. 3-
Pin 7 n. c. 3+
Pin 6 TD- 1-
Pin 5 n. c. 2-
Pin 4 n. c. 2+
Pin 3 TD+ 1+
Pin 2 RD- 0-
Pin 1 RD+ 0+

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 307
Appendix
A.1 TP port

NOTICE

TP cords or TP-XP cords with a maximum length of 10 m can be connected to the RJ-45
TP port.
With the IE FC cables and IE FC RJ-45 plug, an overall cable length of up to 100 m is
permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.

Autonegotiation
Autonegotiation means the automatic detection of the functionality of the port at the opposite
end. Using autonegotiation, network components or end devices can detect the functionality
available at the port of a partner device allowing automatic configuration of different types of
device. With autonegotiation, two components connected to a link segment can exchange
parameters and set themselves to match the supported communication functionality.

Note
With devices that do not support autonegotiation, the IE Switch X-300 port must be set
manually to the speed and duplexity settings of the device (in other words, the identical
setting).

Note
The IE Switch X-300 is a plug-and-play device that does not require settings to be made for
commissioning.

MDI /MDIX autocrossover function

The advantage of the MDI /MDIX autocrossover function is that straight-through cables can
be used throughout and crossover Ethernet cables are unnecessary. This prevents
malfunctions resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This makes installation
much easier for the user.
The IE Switches X-300 all support the MDI / MDIX autocrossover function.

Note
Autocrossover works only in autonegotiation is enabled. If the setting is fixed, there is no
autocrossover (see Glossary).

NOTICE

Please note that a direct connection between two ports on the IE Switch X-300 or an
accidental connection over several IE Switches X-300 can cause illegal formation of loops
unless RSTP or STP is activated. Such a loop can lead to network overload and network
failures.

SCALANCE X-300
308 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Appendix
A.2 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug

A.2 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug

Assembly of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug on an IE FC Standard Cable

For information on assembling an IE FC RJ-45 Plug on a SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
FastConnect cable, please refer to the instructions supplied with the IE FC RJ-45 Plug.

Inserting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug

1. Insert the IE FC RJ-45 Plug in the twisted-pair interface of the IE switch until it locks in
place.

Figure A-2 Inserting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug (based on the example of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180)

The flush fit and locking mechanism of the PROFINET-compliant IE FC RJ-45 Plug along
with the securing collar on the TP port of the IE Switch guarantee a robust connection
suitable for industrial conditions providing tensile and bending strain relief for the inserted
connector.
The RJ-45 interface of the IE Switch X-300EEC is fitted with a securing bracket instead of a
securing collar. To increase mechanical stability, you can secure the IE FC RJ-45 PLUG to
this securing bracket with a cable binder.

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 309
Appendix
A.2 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug

Removing the IE FC RJ-45 Plug

1. Press on the locking lever of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug gently to remove the plug.

Figure A-3 Releasing the RJ-45 plug (based on the example of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180)

If there is not enough space to release the lock with your hand, you can also use a 2.5 mm
screwdriver. You can then remove the IE FC RJ-45 Plug from the twisted pair socket.

Figure A-4 Releasing the RJ-45 plug with a screwdriver (based on the example of the IE FC RJ-45
Plug 180)

SCALANCE X-300
310 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
 Appendix
A.3 Electrical tests (EEC devices)

A.3 Electrical tests (EEC devices)

Regulations / standards
● IEC 60255 (product standards)
● IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
● UL 508
Further standards: See individual tests.

Insulation test
Relevant standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1
Voltage test (routine test) for all circuits except communications and time synchronization
interfaces 2.5 kV (eff) 50 Hz / 3.5 kV DC
Voltage test (routine test) only for protected communications interfaces 500 V (eff) 50 Hz /
707 V DC
Voltage test (routine test) for all circuits except communications interfaces, class III 5 kV
(peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 311
Appendix
A.3 Electrical tests (EEC devices)

EMC tests of immunity (type tests)

Relevant standards: IEC 60255-6 and -22 (product standards), EN 61000-6-2 (generic
standard)
High frequency test IEC 60255-22-1, class III / IEEE C37.90.1, 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz
Discharge of static electricity IEC 60255-22-2, class IV and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV 8 kV
contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance, frequency sweep IEC 60255-22-3, class III
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz 10 V/m; 800 MHz to
960 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz 20 V/m; 1.4 GHz to 2.0 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Irradiation with RF field, single frequencies IEC 60255-22-3, IEC 61000-4-3, class III –
amplitude modulated – pulse modulated 10 V/m 80/160/450/900 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Fast transients / burst IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4 and IEEE C37.90.1 class IV 4 kV
High voltage spikes (SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5 installation class 4, auxiliary voltage pulse:
1.2/50 μs common mode: 4 kV; diff. mode: 2 kV
Relay outputs, common mode: 4 kV; diff. mode: 2 kV (valid for the signaling contact
100..240 V AC/60...250 V DC)
Line conducted high frequency, amplitude modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III 10 V; 150 kHz
to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Power frequency magnetic field IEC 60255-6 IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 0.5 mT; 50 Hz, 30 A/m
permanent; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
Radiated electromagnetic interference IEEE Std C37.90.2 35 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz

EMC tests of emission (type tests)

Relevant standard: EN 61000-6-1 (generic standard)
Radiated emission on cables, only auxiliary voltage IEC-CISPR 22 150 kHz to 30 MHz limit
value class A
Radiated electric field strength IEC-CISPR 22, 30 MHz to 1000 MHz limit value class A
Voltage fluctuations and flicker on the power supply cable at 230 VAC IEC 61000-3-3; limit
values kept to.

SCALANCE X-300
312 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12
Index

M
A MDI /MDIX autocrossover function, 308
ATEX, 15 Media redundancy, 38, 40
Autonegotiation, 85, 308 Media redundancy methods, 38, 41
MM900, 24
MRP, 39
B
BA - Operating Instructions, 4 N
BAK - Operating Instructions (compact), 4
Network topologies, 20
Linear structure, 20, 33
C Redundant coupling of two network segments, 42
Ring with redundancy manager, 35
Communication modes, 85 Star structure, 34
Compatibility list, 45 Node localization, 144
Connector pinout
IE Switch X-300, 307
C-PLUG, 65 P
changing (X-300EEC), 65
PH - Configuration Manual, 4
Pin assignment
D Diagnostics port connecting cable, 146
Possible attachments
Diagnostics port connecting cable SCALANCE 307-3LD, 50
Pin assignment, 146 SCALANCE 308-2 LD, 55
SCALANCE 308-2LH, 51
SCALANCE 308-2LH+, 52
E SCALANCE 308-2M, 59
EMC directive, 223, 230, 236, 243, 248, 264, 268 SCALANCE 320-1 FE, 57
Ethernet switches, 19 SCALANCE X302-7, 64
SCALANCE X306-1LD FE, 48
SCALANCE X307-3, 49
H SCALANCE X308-2, 54
SCALANCE X310, 56
Hazardous (Ex) area, 14 SCALANCE X310FE, 53
HSR, 41 SCALANCE X320-3LD FE, 58
SCALANCE XR324-12M, 62
Power supply
L Media modules, 126
Low voltage equipment directive, 243 Redundancy, 137

SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12 313
Index

Transceiver, 126

R
Redundancy
Power supply, 131, 137
Redundancy manager, 35, 38

S
SFP, 24
Signaling contact
redundant, 66

T
Transmission mode, 85
Full duplex, 85
Half duplex, 85
Transmission rate, 85

X
X-300EEC power supply
Redundancy, 131

SCALANCE X-300
314 Operating Instructions, 02/2012, A5E01113043-12